Menu

Luke 10:30 — Word Study

Depth

N1904ὑπολαβὼν δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν· ἄνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Ἰεριχὼ καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν οἳ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιθέντες ἀπῆλθον ἀφέντες ἡμιθανῆ τυγχάνοντα.

BSAHaving taken [it] uphupolambanō [supposed, made an assumption] nowde <the>ho JesusIēsous [the Savior, God's salvation] said;legō A mananthrōpos [a human being, someone] certaintis was going downkatabainō [traveling, descending] fromapo JerusalemHierousalēm [the holy city, the capital of Palestine] toeis JerichoHierichō [a city in Palestine, near the Jordan River] andkai robberslēstēs [thieves, rebels, those who take by force] fell amongperipiptō [was attacked, suffered] whohos, hē [the robbers, the attackers] bothkai having strippedekduō [who stripped him, took his clothing and belongings] himautos [wounded him, gave him blows] andkai woundsplēgē having inflictedepitithēmi they went awayaperchomai [departed, left him] having left [him]aphiēmi [abandoning him, giving him up] half deadhēmithanēs [severely injured, almost dead, on the brink of death] state.tugchanō

Word
Listen & take awayLuke 10
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 30 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (tugchanō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Luke 10:30quick helps
In a sentenceJesus tells a story about a man traveling from Jerusalem to Jericho who is attacked by robbers.
Who is speakingJesus, responding to a question about who is a neighbor.
Where we areThe parable of the Good Samaritan, illustrating love and compassion.
The hard wordὑπολαμβάνω
Take awayThe man was left severely injured and abandoned.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectὑπολαμβάνω verbὑπολαμβάνω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

1 of 26 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Luke 10:30

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Parable of the Good Samaritangenerated

29But wanting to justify himself, he asked Jesus, “And who is my neighbor?”
30Jesus took up this question and said, “A man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho when he fell into the hands of robbers. They stripped him, beat him, and went away, leaving him half dead.
31Now by chance a priest was going down the same road, but when he saw him, he passed by on the other side.
32So too, when a Levite came to that spot and saw him, he passed by on the other side.

Luke 10:30 presents a parable told by Jesus in response to a question about who qualifies as a neighbor. The story illustrates the actions of a man traveling from Jerusalem to Jericho who encounters robbers. This parable emphasizes themes of compassion and the moral obligation to help others, regardless of social boundaries. It follows a dialogue where Jesus addresses the question of love and neighborliness, making it clear that true neighborly love transcends societal expectations.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Psalm 88:4I am counted among those descending to the Pit. I am like a man without strength.
2Jeremiah 51:52“Therefore, behold, the days are coming,” declares the LORD, “when I will punish her idols, and throughout her land the wounded will groan.
3Lamentations 2:12They cry out to their mothers: “Where is the grain and wine?” as they faint like the wounded in the streets of the city, as their lives fade away in the arms of their mothers.
4Ezekiel 30:24I will strengthen the arms of Babylon’s king and place My sword in his hand, but I will break the arms of Pharaoh, who will groan before him like a mortally wounded man.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 4 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word ὑπολαμβάνω, hupolambanōgenerated

The verb ὑπολαμβάνω (hupolambanō) means to take up or suppose, derived from the prefix ὑπο- (under) and λαμβάνω (to take). It is used to indicate making an assumption or taking something for granted, as seen in this context where Jesus takes up the question posed to Him.

This participle is in the nominative masculine singular form, indicating that it acts as the subject of the sentence. The use of this word shows Jesus' engagement with the question, suggesting a thoughtful and deliberate response.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

In this study, the verse is primarily examined in the Berean Standard Bible (BSB), which uses the phrase Jesus took up this question and said. Other translations, such as the KJV and ASV, offer variations like Jesus answering said and Jesus made answer and said, respectively.

The translations differ in their choice of phrasing, particularly with the Greek word ἄνθρωπός. The BSB uses A man, while the KJV opts for A certain man, reflecting a slight variation in emphasis but retaining the same core meaning.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the passage is εἶπεν, he said, which governs the entire statement. The structure includes a noun phrase as the subject, followed by a series of clauses that describe the actions of the man and the robbers.

The sentence is complex, with multiple clauses detailing the man's journey, the attack by robbers, and the resulting state of the man. This structure highlights the sequence of events and the consequences of the actions taken by the robbers.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

Ἰερουσαλὴμ is the Greek term for Jerusalem, which corresponds to the Hebrew יְרוּשָׁלִַם. This city is often referenced in the Septuagint and holds significant religious and cultural importance in both the Old and New Testaments.

The term Ἰεριχὼ corresponds to the Hebrew יְרִיחוֹ, indicating Jericho's historical and geographical relevance, particularly as a location in the narrative of Jesus' ministry.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Luke 10:30 tells the story of a man traveling from Jerusalem to Jericho who was attacked by robbers. They stripped him of his clothes, beat him, and left him half dead. This parable illustrates the importance of compassion and helping those in need.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does the parable teach about who is a neighbor?

The parable emphasizes that a neighbor is anyone who shows compassion and mercy, regardless of social or ethnic boundaries.

Why did Jesus tell this parable?

Jesus told this parable in response to a question about who qualifies as a neighbor, aiming to challenge the listeners' understanding of love and compassion.

What is the significance of the man being left half dead?

Being left half dead highlights the severity of the man's injuries and the urgency of needing help, setting the stage for the actions of the Samaritan.

How do the actions of the robbers contrast with the Good Samaritan?

The robbers' violent actions represent selfishness and cruelty, while the Good Samaritan's actions exemplify kindness and selflessness.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How can I demonstrate compassion to someone in need in my community?
  2. What barriers do I face in loving my neighbor, and how can I overcome them?
  3. In what ways can I be more aware of those who are hurting around me?
  4. How does this parable challenge my understanding of who deserves my help?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church Fathers have commented on this parable, interpreting its deeper meanings and implications for understanding human nature and divine mercy.

Origen of AlexandriaHOMILIES ON THE GOSPEL OF Luke 34.3, 9 c. 185–253
One of the elders wanted to interpret the parable as follows. The man who was going down is Adam. Jerusalem is paradise, and Jericho is the world. The robbers are hostile powers.
Early Church Fathers on Luke 10 →
Ambrose of MilanCommentary on Luke c. 339–397
Jericho is an image of this world. Adam, cast out from Paradise, that heavenly Jerusalem, descended to it by the mistake of his transgression, that is, departing from the living to hell,
Early Church Fathers on Luke 10 →
Ambrose of MilanCommentary on Luke c. 339–397
That extraordinary Samaritan did not himself shun him whom the priest and the Levite had shunned. In the name of a sect, you may not shun him whom you will admire by interpretation of the word.
Early Church Fathers on Luke 10 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Luke 10:30 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And Jesus answering, said,.... The following things; which may either be considered as a narrative of matter of fact, or as a supposed case, and delivered by way of parable; and in either way, though

Read John Gill on Luke 10 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And Jesus answering said, A certain man went down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell among thieves, which stripped him of his raiment, and wounded him, and departed, leaving him half dead.

Read Robert Jamieson on Luke 10 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Ver. 30-37. It is certain that the principal scope of our Saviour in this history, or parable, was to convince the lawyer, that every one is our neighbour to whom God offereth us an opportunity of doing good, whether he be of our nation or region or not. Every object of our mercy is our neighbour, whom God requireth us to love as ourselves. This was quite contrary to the common doctrine of the scribes’ and Pharisees’ interpreting the law, Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself, and excellently served our Saviour’ s design, to show this lawyer that he understood not, much less observed, the law of God in that manner, as that he could justify himself from the violation of it. He also by the…

Read Matthew Poole on Luke 10 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

30 And Jesus answering said, A certain man went down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell among thieves, which stripped him of his raiment, and wounded him, and departed, leaving him half dead. Ver. 30. And Jesus answering] Gr. υπολαβων. Taking the tale out of his mouth, being ready with his answer. For he is that Palmoni Hammedabber, in Daniel 8:13, that prime prolocutor.

Read John Trapp on Luke 10 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(30) A certain man went down.—Better, was going down. We enter here upon the first of a series of parables, which differ from those in St. Matthew in having more the character of actual human histories, illustrating a truth, rather than mere similitudes (“parables” in the usual sense of the word) composed for the purpose of illustration. There is obviously no reason why we should not believe them to have been (as in one case the mention of a proper name seems to imply, Lazarus, in Luke 16:20) statements of facts that had actually happened, and which had come under our Lord’s observation as He travelled on His work of preaching the gospel of the Kingdom. From Jerusalem to Jericho.—The…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Luke 10 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 30. And Jesus answering] Rather, Then Jesus took him up. This I believe to be the meaning of the word υπολαβων; he threw out a challenge, and our Lord took him up on his own ground. See WAKEFIELD'S Testament. A certain man went down from Jerusalem] Or, A certain man of Jerusalem going down to Jericho. This was the most public road in all Judea, as it was the grand thoroughfare between these two cities for the courses of priests, twelve thousand of whom are said to have resided at Jericho. See Lightfoot. Fell among thieves] At this time the whole land of Judea was much infested with hordes of banditti; and it is not unlikely that many robberies might have been committed on that very…

Read AdamClarke on Luke 10 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

30. A certain man] Clearly, as the tenor of the Parable implies, a Jew.went down from Jerusalem to Jericho] A rocky, dangerous gorge (Jos. B. J. IV. 8, § 3), haunted by marauding Bedawin, and known as ‘the bloody way’ (Adommim, Jerome, De loc. Hebr. and on Jeremiah 3:2). The “went down” is strictly accurate, for the road descends very rapidly from Jerusalem to the Jordan valley. The distance is about 21 miles. For Jericho, see Luke 19:1.thieves] Rather, “robbers,” “brigands.” Palestine was notorious for these plundering Arabs. Herod the Great had rendered real service to the country in extirpating them from their haunts, but they constantly sprung up again, and even the Romans could not…

Read Cambridge on Luke 10 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Jesus answering - Jesus answered him in a very different manner from what he expected.

Read Albert Barnes on Luke 10 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

Jesus took up this question and said, “A man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho when he fell into the hands of robbers. They stripped him, beat him, and went away, leaving him half dead.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Jesus answered, “A certain man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and he fell among robbers, who both stripped him and beat him, and departed, leaving him half dead.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

Jesus took up this question and said, “A man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho when he fell into the hands of robbers. They stripped him, beat him, and went away, leaving him half dead.

NETBNew English Translation2006

Jesus replied, “A man was going down from Jerusalem and fell into the hands of robbers, who stripped him, beat him up, and went off, leaving him half dead.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And Jesus answering said, A certain man went down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell among thieves, which stripped him of his raiment, and wounded him, and departed, leaving him half dead.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

Jesus made answer and said, A certain man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho; and he fell among robbers, who both stripped him and beat him, and departed, leaving him half dead.

RVARevised Version, American1894

Jesus made answer and said, A certain man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho; and he fell among robbers, which both stripped him and beat him, and departed, leaving him half dead.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And Jesus answering said, A certain man went down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell among robbers, who stripped him of his raiment, and wounded him , and departed, leaving him half dead.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And Iesus answered, and saide, A certaine man went downe from Hierusalem to Iericho, and fell among theeues, and they robbed him of his raiment, and wounded him, and departed, leauing him halfe dead.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And Jesus replying said, A certain man descended from Jerusalem to Jericho and fell into [the hands of] robbers, who also, having stripped him and inflicted wounds, went away leaving him in a half-dead state.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and Jesus having taken up [the word], said, 'A certain man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell among robbers, and having stripped him and inflicted blows, they went away, leaving [him] half dead.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

And Jesus having taken up [the word], said, “A certain man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell among robbers, and having stripped him and inflicted blows, they went away, leaving [him] half dead.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Jesus answered him and said, “A certain man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho. He fell among robbers, who stripped him of his belongings, and beat him, and left him half dead.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And Jesus answering, said: A certain man went down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell among robbers, who also stripped him, and having wounded him went away, leaving him half dead.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

Jesus replied, saying, “A man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho. He was attacked by robbers who stripped him and beat him, and left him for dead.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And Jesus, answering him, said, A certain man was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and he got into the hands of thieves, who took his clothing and gave him cruel blows, and when they went away, he was half dead.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἄνθρωπόςanthrōpos A man G444 2 different renderings
manASV BBE DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
a manBSB FBV MSB NETB
κατέβαινενkatabainō was going down G2597 2 different renderings
was going downASV BBE BSB FBV LSV MSB NETB RVA ULB WEB YLT
went downDRA KJV NWB
λῃσταῖςlēstēs robbers G3027 2 different renderings
robbersASV BSB DBY DRA FBV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
thievesBBE KJV
περιέπεσενperipiptō fell among G4045 2 different renderings
fell amongASV DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
was attackedFBV
ἐκδύσαντεςekduō having stripped G1562 2 different renderings
who stripped himFBV NETB NWB ULB
having strippedDBY LSV YLT
πληγὰςplēgē wounds G4127 2 different renderings
blowsBBE LSV YLT
woundsDBY

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseclauseadverbialὑπολαβὼνHaving taken [it] upnoun phrase · subject-ἸησοῦςJesusverbεἶπενsaidclauseclausenoun phrase · subjectἌνθρωπόςA manτιςcertainverbκατέβαινενwas going downprepositional phrase · adverbialprepositional phraseἀπὸfromἹερουσαλὴμJerusalemprepositional phraseεἰςtoἹερειχώJerichoκαὶandclauseadverbialλῃσταῖςrobbersverbπεριέπεσενfell amongclausesubjectοἳwhoadverbialκαὶbothclause · adverbialclauseverbἐκδύσαντεςhaving strippedobjectαὐτὸνhimκαὶandclauseobjectπληγὰςwoundsverbἐπιθέντεςhaving inflictedverbἀπῆλθονwent awayclause · adverbialverbἀφέντεςhaving left [him]objectἡμιθανῆhalf dead

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Suscipiens autem Jesus, dixit : Homo quidam descendebat ab Jerusalem in Jericho, et incidit in latrones, qui etiam despoliaverunt eum : et plagis impositis abierunt semivivo relicto.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܐܡܪ ܠܗ ܝܫܘܥ ܓܒܪܐ ܚܕ ܢܚܬ ܗܘܐ ܡܢ ܐܘܪܫܠܡ ܠܐܝܪܝܚܘ ܘܢܦܠܘ ܥܠܘܗܝ ܠܣܛܝܐ ܘܫܠܚܘܗܝ ܘܡܚܐܘܗܝ ܘܫܒܩܘܗܝ ܟܕ ܩܠܝܠ ܩܝܡܐ ܒܗ ܢܦܫܐ ܘܐܙܠܘ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ὑπολαβὼν Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν· ἄνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Ἰεριχὼ καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν οἳ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιθέντες ἀπῆλθον ἀφέντες ἡμιθανῆ

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ὑπολαβὼν Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν· ἄνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Ἰεριχὼ καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν οἳ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιθέντες ἀπῆλθον ἀφέντες ἡμιθανῆ

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

ὑπολαβὼν δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν· ἄνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Ἰεριχὼ καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν οἳ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιθέντες ἀπῆλθον ἀφέντες ἡμιθανῆ

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

ὑπολαβὼν Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν· ἄνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Ἰεριχὼ καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν οἳ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιθέντες ἀπῆλθον ἀφέντες ἡμιθανῆ

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

ὑπολαβὼν Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν· ἄνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Ἰεριχὼ καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν οἳ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιθέντες ἀπῆλθον ἀφέντες ἡμιθανῆ

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

ὑπολαβὼν Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν· ἄνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Ἰεριχὼ καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν οἳ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιθέντες ἀπῆλθον ἀφέντες ἡμιθανῆ

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

ὑπολαβὼν δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν· ἄνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Ἰεριχὼ καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν οἳ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιθέντες ἀπῆλθον ἀφέντες ἡμιθανῆ τυγχάνοντα.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

ὑπολαβὼν δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν· ἄνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Ἰεριχὼ καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν οἳ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιθέντες ἀπῆλθον ἀφέντες ἡμιθανῆ τυγχάνοντα.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
δὲ nowSBL, TR, ByzNA28, NA27, WH, Treg, Tyn
τυγχάνοντα. state.TR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Luke 10:30ὑπολαμβάνωHaving takeHaving taken [iὑπολαμβάνωδέnownowδέ<the><the>ἸησοῦςJesusJesusἸησοῦςειπενsaid;said;ειπενἄνθρωποςA manA manἄνθρωποςτὶςcertaincertainτὶςκαταβαίνωwas going dwas going downκαταβαίνωἀπόfromfromἀπόἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemJerusalemἹεροσόλυμαεἰςtotoεἰςἸεριχώJerichoJerichoἸεριχώκαίandandκαίλῃστήςrobbersrobbersλῃστήςπεριπίπτωfell amongfell amongπεριπίπτωὅςwhowhoὅςκαίbothbothκαίἐκδύωhaving strihaving strippedἐκδύωαὐτόςhimhimαὐτόςκαίandandκαίπληγήwoundswoundsπληγήἐπιτίθημιhaving inflhaving inflicteἐπιτίθημιἀπέρχομαιthey went athey went awayἀπέρχομαιἀφίημιhaving lefthaving left [hiἀφίημιἡμιθανήςhalf deadhalf deadἡμιθανήςτυγχάνωstate.state.τυγχάνωὑπόPrep. by, Prep. by, underὑπόεἶπονv. I say, v. I say, speakεἶπονκατάPrep. downPrep. down fromκατάἹεροσόλυμαn.f. & n.nn.f. & n.n. JerἹεροσόλυμαπερίPrep. abouPrep. about, coπερίἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκπλήσσωv. I strikv. I strike, smπλήσσωἐπίPrep. on, Prep. on, to, aἐπίἀνήρn.m. a maln.m. a male humἀνήρὀπτάνομαιv. I appeav. I appear, amὀπτάνομαιArticle thArticle theοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦἥμισυςAdj halfAdj halfἥμισυςθνῄσκωv. I am dyv. I am dying, θνῄσκωτύπτωv. I beat,v. I beat, striτύπτωτίκτωv. I bear,v. I bear, brinτίκτω
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Luke 10:30

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ὑπολαβὼνhupolambanō Having taken [it] up G5274 Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
5× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To take up or suppose means to assume or think something is true, like in Acts 1:9. It is about making an assumption. In the Bible, it is often used to describe people who are trying to understand or figure something out, like in the story of Jesus and his disciples.
Amplified meaning
supposed, made an assumption
Tyndale gloss
to take up/suppose
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑπολαμβάνω (hupolambanō) is built from the prefix ὑπο- (under) and the verb λαμβάνω (to take). It covers meanings such as to take up, receive, assume, or respond in discourse. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like Acts 1:9 and Luke 7:43, where it conveys both literal and figurative senses of taking or assuming.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπο-λαμβάνω

[in LXX: Jb 2:4 4:1 and freq. (עָנָה), Ps 47 (48):9 (דָּמָה pi.), To 6:17, Wi 17:2, III Mac 3:8, 11, al. ;]

to take or bear up (by supporting from beneath): c. acc pers., Ac 1:9.

to receive, welcome, entertain (Xen.): III Jo 8.

to catch up in speech (Hdt., al.; Jb, ll. c.): Lk 10:30.

Of mental action, to assume, suppose (Xen., al.; To, Wis, III Mac, ll. c.): Ac 2:15; seq. ὅτι (v. Bl., § 70, 2), Lk 7:43.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπολαμβάνω; 2 aor. ὑπέλαβον; 1. to take up (lit. under [cf. ὑπό, III. 1]) in order to raise, to bear on high, (Hdt. 1, 24); to take up and carry away (ὥσπερ νῆα ἄνεμοι ὑπολαβόντες, Stob. serm. 6 p. 79, 17) : τινά, Acts 1. 9 (see ὀφθαλμός, mid.). 2. to receive hospitably, welcome: τινά, ὃ Jn. 8 LT Tr WH (Xen. an. 1, 1, 7). 9: to take up i. 6. follow in speech, in order either to reply to or controvert or supplement what another has said (very often so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down): ὑπολαβὼν εἶπεν, Lk. x. 80 (for 73), Job ii. 4; iv. 1; vi. 1; ix. 1; xi. 1; xii. 1, etc.). 4. to take up in the mind, i.e. to assume, suppose: Acts ii. 15; foll. by ὅτι (sc. πλεῖον ἀγαπήσει), Lk. vii. 43, (Job xxv. 3; Tob. vi. 18; Sap. xvii. 2; 3 Mace. iii.8; 4 Mace. ν. 17 (18) etc., and often in prof. auth. fr. Xen. and Plat.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑπολαμβάνω. The derived meaning ‘‘ take up in the mind,” ‘‘assume,”’ “suppose,” which this verb has in Lk 74%, Ac 215, may be illustrated from such passages as P Cairo Zen II. 59251 (B.C. 252) ὑπελαμβάνομεν ταχέως παρέσασθαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς, P Tebt I. 1515 (B.c. 114) καλῶς ἔχειν ὑπελάβομεν διασαφῆσαι ἵ[ν᾽ εἰδῇς, ‘‘ therefore I thought it well to report the matter for your information” (Edd.), P Grenf II. 36!° (B.C. 95) ὑπελαμβάνοσαν φονευθήσεσθαι, “they expected to be killed,” and P Fay 124%5 (ii/a.D.) μὴ yap ὑπολάβῃς τὴ]ν μητέραν cov περὶ τούτων [τ]ρέμειν, ‘do not suppose that your mother has any alarm about this course’ (Edd.). For the more literal ‘‘take up and carry away” (cf. Ac 1°), see CPR I. 12! (A.p. 83-4) ὅτι δ᾽ ἂν τούτων παραβῆι ἡ ΤΠτολεμ]αὶς ἀποτίσ{εται τῷ Μάρωνι παρ]αχρῆμα ὃ ὑπείληφεν... κεφαλαῖον μεθ᾽ ἡμιολίας, and BGU III. γοο 19 (time of Anton. Pius) ἀποτισάτω ἂς ὑπείληφεν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑπολαμβάνω (hupolambanō) — to take up/suppose.

ὑπολαμβάνω,

also ὑπολάζυμαι (which see), late Doric dialect 3rd.pers. plural future -λαμψοῦνται[Refs]:—take up by getting under, as the dolphin did [NT+6th c.BC+]

__b bear up, support, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. take up, seize or come suddenly upon, ὑπὸ τρόμος ἔλλαβε γυῖα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of a storm of wind, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a fit of madness, [Refs]; of a pestilence,[Refs]; of a river taking up earth thrown into it, [Refs]; of winds taking up water, [Refs]; of soldiers marching, δυσχωρία ὑπελάμβανεν αὐτούς, i. e. they came suddenly into difficult ground, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of events, follow next, come next, ὑπέλαβε ναυμαχίη καρτερή [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑπολαμβάνω

hupolambano

from 5259 and 2983; to take from below, i.e. carry upward;

figuratively, to take up, i.e. continue a discourse or topic;

mentally, to assume (presume):--answer, receive, suppose.

see GREEK for 5259

see GREEK for 2983

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑπολαμβάνω

v.

I take up, receive, answer, suppose, welcome

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑπολαμβάνω hypolambanō 5x

to take up, by placing one’s self underneath what is taken up; to catch away, withdraw, Acts 1:9; to take up discourse by continuation; hence, to answer, Lk. 10:30; to take up a notion, to think, suppose, Lk. 7:43; Acts 2:15; receive as a guest, 3 Jn. 8*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑπολαμβάνω fut. -λήψομαι aor2 ὑπ-έλα^βον perf. -είληφα to take up by getting under, as the dolphin did Arion, Hdt.: to receive into its bosom, NTest.

to bear up, support, Hdt.

to take by the hand, Plat.

to seize or come suddenly upon, of fear, Hom.; of a fit of madness, a pestilence, Hdt.; δυσχωρία ὑπελάμβανεν αὐτούς, i. e. they came suddenly into difficult ground, Xen.; then, of events, to follow next, come next, Hdt.

to take up the discourse and answer, to reply, rejoin, retort, Thuc., Plat., etc.:— absol., in dialogue, ἔφη ὑπολαβών, ὑπ. ἔφη, ὑπ. εἶπεν he said in answer, Hdt., Thuc., etc.

to take up, interrupt, Xen.

to take up the conqueror, fight with him, Lat. excipere, Thuc.

to take up a charge, id. Thuc.

= ὑποδέχομαι, to receive and protect, Xen.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAP-NSM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
20%hid
hid20% · 1×suppose20% · 1×receive20% · 1×i take it20% · 1×having taken up20% · 1×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb80%adverbial20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ΣίμωνSimon
νεφέληa cloud
καίand, even, also,
σύ
ὡςas, like as, how
ὀφείλωI owe, ought
οὖνtherefore, then
ὑπολαμβάνωHaving taken [it] up
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusτοιοῦτος
ὅτιthat, since, because
ὅς
αὐτός
ἀπό
οὗτος
μεθύωI am drunk

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑπολαμβάνω · 5× in the New Testament
Acts Luke 3 John
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 33 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.68c. AD 40

μὰ τὸν ἀληθῆ μόνον θεὸν οὐδὲν οὕτως αἰσχρὸν ἡγοῦμαι ὡς τὸ ὑπολαμβάνειν ὅτι νοῶ ἢ ὅτι αἰσθάνομαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.55c. AD 75–95

ἔνθεν ὁ Κάις παροξυνθεὶς ἐπὶ τῷ προτετιμῆσθαι τὸν Ἄβελον ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ κτείνει τὸν ἀδελφὸν καὶ τὸν νεκρὸν αὐτοῦ ποιήσας ἀφανῆ λήσειν ὑπέλαβεν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Oxy. 42 3025OxyrhynchosAD 118

βούλομαί σε ἐν δημοσίῳ προθεῖναι τόπῳ. πέπεισμαι γὰρ ἅπαντας τοὺς κατασταθέντας ὑπʼ ἐμοῦ ὡς ὑπολαμβάνω ἐπιμελῶς καὶ μεθʼ ἧς προσῆκεν ἐξετάσεως ἀκολούθως ταῖς τοῦ κρατίστου ἡγεμόνος ἐντολαῖς

P.Herm. 12AD 101–AD 225

ἐπυθόμην καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν σῶν γραμμάτων, οἷς πιστεύσας καὶ τῇ τοῦ τεχνίτου ἐπαγγελίᾳ Κρητικὴν ὑπολαμβάνω ἐσχηκέναι, καὶ οὕτως ἐπὶ τοῦ ἔργου φανῆναι εὔχομαι, εἰ καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς πολλῆς κατεργασίας

P.Fam.Tebt. 42AntinoopolisAD 180

τινοιμεναλ … … πιοντες ἁπλᾶ φέρουσι τὰ ἐπικεφάλια ἐγὼ δὲ αὐτοὺς ὁμοίους τοῖς ἄλλοις ὑπολαμβάνω … δους γείνεσθαι … τως δέδωκεν ωκεν ἐπιτρέψας μένειν ἐνθάδε οὗ καταμένουσι … του

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
δὲde now G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέnow2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ἸησοῦςIēsous Jesus G2424 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Jesus is the Greek name for Joshua, which means God is salvation. It is used to refer to Jesus Christ, the son of God, as well as other Israelites with the same name. The name Jesus appears over 900 times in the New Testament.
Amplified meaning
the Savior, God's salvation
Tyndale gloss
Joshua
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Ἰησοῦς (*Iēsous*) refers primarily to Jesus, the Savior, and is derived from the Hebrew name Joshua or Jehoshua. It appears frequently in the New Testament, denoting Jesus Christ, and also refers to other figures named Jesus, such as Jesus, son of Eliezer, and Jesus Justus. The entries consistently identify it as a common name among Israelites.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dat., voc. -οῦ, acc., -οῦν (Heb. יְהוֹשׁוּעַ, יְהֹשֻׁעַ, יֵשׁוּעַ),

JESUS: Mt 1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, Mt 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, Mt 1:1, Mk 1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Ro 2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Ac 28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mk 1:24, al.

Joshua: Ac 7:45, He 4:8.

Jesus, son of Eliezer: Lk 3:29.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Ἰησοῦς, -οὔ, dat. -οὔ, ace. -vdv, voc. -od, [W. § 10, 1], 6, Jesus (ΠῚ and ace. to a later form jw, Syr. > ” Saas, i. e. whose help is Jehovah; Germ. Gotthilf; but later writ. gave the name the force of My31w, see Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 Ἰησοῦς ὃς ἐγένετο κατὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ μέγας ἐπὶ σωτηρίᾳ ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ, of Joshua, the successor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21 Ἰησοῦς ἑρμηνεύεται σωτηρία κυρίου), a very Com. prop. name among the Israelites; cf. Delitzsch, Der Jesusname, in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or Talmud. Stud. xv.]. Inthe N. T. 1. Joshua [fully Jehoshua], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses’ successor: Acts vii. 45; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son of Eliezer, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 29 L T Tr WH. 3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of mankind: Mt. i. 21, 25; ΓΚ. i. 31; ii. 21, and very often; see κύριος and Χριστός. 4. Jesus…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Ἰησοῦς nor in language of disrespect to the established religion of our city”: see further CRE® p. 260, and Lightfoot Assays on Supernatural Religion, p. 299f., who cites an inscr. found in this very temple of Ephesus, though of a later date than the passage in Acts,—éorw ἱεροσυλία kal ἀσέβεια, ““let it be regarded as sacrilege and impiety” (Wood Zzscr. vi. I, p. 14). Other exx. of the adj. from the inscrr. are Syll 523% (iii/B.c.) ὁ δὲ εἴπας ἢ [πρήξ]ας τι παρὰ τόνδε τὸν νόμον .. . ἔστω ἱερόσυλος, 2). 6028 (iv/iii B.c.) ἢν δέ τις [τὴν στήλην] ἀφαν[(ζηι ἢ τὰ γράμματα], πασχέτω ὡς ἱερόσυλος, and 24. 680!° (Rom.). The new Menander shows several exx. of ἱερόσυλε used in abuse with a general sense (cf. ‘‘ horse-thief’’): e.g. Menandrea, p. 60 388 tep[d]ovde παῖ, Ρ. 3852: ἱερόσυλε…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Joshua.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Joshua.

Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ,

Joses;

1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἰησοῦς

Iesous

of Hebrew origin (3091); Jesus (i.e. Jehoshua), the name of our Lord

and two (three) other Israelites:--Jesus.

see HEBREW for 03091

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἰησοῦς, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

Jesus

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Ἰησοῦς Iēsous 917x

a Savior, Jesus, Mt. 1:21, 25; 2:1, et al. freq.; Joshua, Acts 7:45; Heb. 4:8; Jesus, a Jewish Christian, Col. 4:11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

Ἰησοῦς Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

je'-zus (Iesous, for yehoshua`):

(1) Joshua, son of Nun (the King James Version Ac 7:45; Heb 4:8; compare 1 Macc 2:55; 2 Esdras 7:37).

(2) (3) High priest and Levite.

See JESHUA, 2, 5.

(4) Son of Sirach.

See SIRACH.

(5) An ancestor of Jesus (Lu 3:29, the King James Version "Jose").

(6) (7) See the next three articles.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Jesus

(1.) Joshua, the son of Nun (Acts 7:45; Heb. 4:8; R.V., “Joshua”).

(2.) A Jewish Christian surnamed Justus (Col. 4:11).

Je’sus, the proper, as Christ is the official, name of our Lord. To distinguish him from others so called, he is spoken of as “Jesus of Nazareth” (John 18:7), and “Jesus the son of Joseph” (John 6:42).

This is the Greek form of the Hebrew name Joshua, which was originally Hoshea (Num. 13:8, 16), but changed by Moses into Jehoshua (Num. 13:16;

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

savior; deliverer

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%jesus
jesus99% · 979×other renderings1% · 9×

988 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject56%adverbial23%object14%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςδέbut, on the otheἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
Χριστόςanointed, the Messia
ἐνArticle theκαίand, even, also,
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
ἐγώ
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastἀποστέλλωI send forth, seὁμολογίαa profession, co
ἸησοῦςJesus913×
what comes after →
Χριστόςanointed, the Messia
Article theκαίand, even, also,εἰς
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastΝαζωραῖοςNazareneυἱόςa son, descenden
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theοὐNeg
καίand, even, also, nam
λέγωI say, speakArticle theὁράωI see, look upon
εἰς
Article theἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemχωρίονa place, piece o

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceἸησοῦς · 913× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke Mark Acts Romans 1 Corinthians Philippians Ephesians 2 Corinthians Galatians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 43 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Drunkenness 96c. AD 40

λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „ἀκούσας Ἰησοῦς τῆς φωνῆς τοῦ λαοῦ κεκραγότων εἶπε πρὸς Μωυσῆν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.49c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῆς πληθύος ἀποκρίνας πᾶν τὸ μάχιμον Ἰησοῦν ἐφίστησιν αὐτῷ Ναυήκου μὲν υἱὸν φυλῆς τῆς Ἐφραιμίτιδος, ἀνδρειότατον δὲ καὶ πόνους ὑποστῆναι γενναῖον καὶ νοῆσαί τε καὶ εἰπεῖν ἱκανώτατον καὶ θρησκεύοντα τὸν θεὸν ἐκπρεπῶς καὶ Μωυσῆν διδάσκαλον τῆς…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.6c. AD 100

ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Got. 60Arsinoites (?)AD 591–AD 602

οτο Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ … … ιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου … … Τιβερίου τοῦ ωηις

Tyche 21 (2006), p. 1-10OxyrhynchosAD 599

r ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου καὶ δεσπότου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν. ὑπατείας τοῦ αὐτοῦ εὐσεβεστάτου ἡμῶν δεσπότου ἔτους ιϛ,

P.Rain.Cent. 120ArsinoitesAD 612

r ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου καὶ δεσπότου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν. Βασιλείας τοῦ εὐσεβεστάτου καὶ φιλανθρώπου ἡμῶν δεσπότου Φλαουίου

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
εἶπεν·legō said; G2036 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
1,988× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἶπον (eipon) — to say.

εἶπον

(present ἔπω is used by [Refs 2nd c.BC+]present in use is φημί, λέγω, ἀγορεύω (see. infr. IV), the future ἐρέω, ἐρῶ, the perfect εἴρηκα), Epic dialect and Lyric poetry ἔειπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; subjunctive εἴπω (Epic dialect εἴπωμι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative εἴποιμ; infinitive εἰπεῖν, Epic dialect -έμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs]; participle εἰπών: also aorist 1 εἶπα (ἔειπα [Refs 5th c.BC+] as I said, [Refs 1st c.BC+] mostly in Ionic dialect Prose, also [Refs 4th c.BC+], and the 2nd pers. indicative and imperative of this form are preferred in Attic dialect, 2nd pers. singular indicative εἶπας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative εἶπον (on the accent see[Refs 5th c.BC+], -ατον, -ατ; 3rd.pers. plural εἶπαν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; participle εἴπας [Refs 4th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect εἴπαις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in compounds middle ἀπείπασθαι (which see), διείπασθαι (which see)…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

epo

a primary verb (used only in the definite past tense, the others being

borrowed from 2046, 4483, and 5346); to speak or say (by word or

writing):--answer, bid, bring word, call, command, grant, say (on),

speak, tell. Compare 3004.

see GREEK for 2046

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 3004

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔπω εἶπον prob. made up by Nicander as present of εἶπον. to say, Nicander.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
39%said
said39% · 372×he said27% · 260×they said7% · 67×having said4% · 40×other renderings15% · 143×other renderings8% · 73×

955 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 73 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ἄνθρωπόςanthrōpos A man G444 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
548× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means a human being, and is used in the Bible to describe people, like in John 16:21 and Romans 7:1.
Amplified meaning
a human being, someone
Tyndale gloss
a human
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἄνθρωπος (i.e., *anthropos*) means 'man' or 'human being,' encompassing both males and females. It is derived from roots meaning 'man-faced' and is used in various contexts throughout the New Testament, such as to distinguish humans from God and animals. The term can imply human frailty and is often used in phrases that reflect human nature or condition.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for אָדָם, אִישׁ, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc.;]

man:

generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jo 16:21; c. art., Mt 4:4 12:35, Mk 2:27, Jo 2:25, Ro 7:1, al; disting. from God, Mt 19:6, Jo 10:33, Col 3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mt 4:19, Lk 5:10, Re 9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, I Co 3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἄνθρωπος, -ov, 6, [perh. fr. ἀνήρ and oy, i. e. man’s face; Curtius § 422; Vaniéek p.9. From Hom. down]; man. Tt is used 1. univ., with ref. to the genus or nature, without distinction of sex, a human being, whether male or female: Jn. xvi. 31. And in this sense a. with the article, generically, so as to include all human individuals: Mt. iv. 4 (ἐπ᾿ ἄρτῳ ζήσεται 6 ἄνθρωπος) ; Mt. xii. 35 (ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθ. every good person); Mt. xv. 11, 18; Mk. ii. 27; vil. 15, 18, 20; Lk.iv.4; Jn. ii. 25 [W. § 18, 8]; vii. 51; Ro. vii.1,ete. b. so that a man is distinguished from beings of a different race or order; a. from animals, plants, ete.: Lk. v.10; Mt.iv.19; xii. 12; 2 Pet. ii. 16; Rev. ix. 4, 7, 10, 15,18; xi. 13, ete. β. from God, from Christ as divine, and from angels: Mt. x. 32; xix. 6; Mk. x. 9; Lk. 11. 15 [Ὁ WH om., L Tr br.] (opp. to angels); Jn. x. 33; Acts x. 26; xiv.11; 1 Th. ii. 13…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἄνθρωπος, like ἀνήρ, has kept its differentia practically unchanged from Homer to MGr. It is interesting to notice its philosophical abstract ἀνθρωπότης vouched for as fairly popular Greek by Vettius Valens (p. 346%, in antith. to ἀθανασία), passing into Christian theology (see LS and Sophocles Zex.), and current in MGr. The NT has no trace of the curious misuse by which the principal difference between a. and ἀνήρ is ignored: Tob 65 ἀνθρώπου ἢ γυναικός. P Flor |. 61 (a.p. 86-8) ἄξιος μ[ὲ]ν ἧς μαστιγωθῆναι, διὰ σεαυτοῦ [κ]Ἰατασχὼν ἄνθρωπον εἰσχήμονα καὶ yuv[ai]kas is not parallel, as a. only means as little is Jn 772. (Grimm). Another case of ἄνθρωπος invading the sphere of ἀνήρ is the Matthzean locution ἄ, οἰκοδεσπότης, βασιλεύς, φαγός etc. though not Attic: Mt may have got it from LXX (so Lev 21° ἀνθρώπου ἱερέως). Some papyrus passages may be cited, though little is needed. The…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἄνθρωπος (anthrōpos) — a human.

ἄνθρωπος, ἡ,

Attic dialect crasis ἅνθρωπος, Ionic dialect ὥνθρωπος, for ὁ ἄνθρ-:— man, both as a generic term and of individuals, [Refs 8th c.BC+], opposed to gods, ἀθανάτων τε θεῶν χαμαὶ ἐρχομένων τ᾽ ἀνθρώπων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; πρὸς ἠοίων ἢ ἑσπερίων ἀνθρώπων the men of the east or of the west, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; even of the dead in the Isles of the Blest,[Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. [Refs 5th c.BC+] uses it both with and without the Article to denote man generically, ὁ ἄ. θείας μετέσχε μοίρας[Refs]; ὁ ἄ. the ideal man, humanity, ἀπώλεσας τὸν ἄ., οὐκ ἐπλήρωσας τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν[Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἄνθρωπος

anthropos

from 435 and ops (the countenance; from 3700); man-faced, i.e. a human

being:--certain, man.

see GREEK for 435

see GREEK for 3700

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἄνθρωπος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a man, one of the human race

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἄνθρωπος anthrōpos 550x

a human being, Jn. 16:21; Phil. 2:7; an individual, Rom. 3:28, et al. freq.; used also pleonastically with other words, Mt. 11:19; et al.; met. the spiritual frame of the inner man, Rom. 7:22; Eph. 3:16; 1 Pet. 3:4

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἄνθρωπος prob. from ἀνήρ, ὤψ, manfaced man, Lat. homo (not vir), opp. to gods, ἀθανάτων τε θεῶν, χαμαὶ ἐρχομένων τ᾽ ἀνθρώπων Il.

with or without the Art. to denote man generally, Plat., etc.

in pl. mankind, ἀνθρώπων, ἀνδρῶν ἠδὲ γυναικῶν Il.; ὁ ἄριστος ἐν ἀνθρώποις ὄρτυξ the best quail in the world, Plat.; μάλιστα, ἥκιστα ἀνθρώπων most, least of all, Hdt., etc.

with another Subst., to give it a contemptuous sense, ἄνθρ. ὑπογραμματεύς, συκοφάντης, Oratt.; so homo histrio Cic.:—so, ἄνθρωπος or ὁ ἄνθρωπος was used alone, the man, the fellow, Plat.:— also in vocat. it was addressed contemptuously to slaves, ἄνθρωπε or ὦ 'νθρωπε, sirrah! you sir! Hdt., Plat.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

See ANTHROPOLOGY.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Man

(1.) Heb. ‘Adam, used as the proper name of the first man. The name is derived from a word meaning “to be red,” and thus the first man was called Adam because he was formed from the red earth. It is also the generic name of the human race (Gen. 1:26, 27; 5:2; 8:21; Deut. 8:3). Its equivalents are the Latin homo and the Greek anthropos (Matt. 5:13, 16). It denotes also man in opposition to woman (Gen. 3:12; Matt. 19:10).

(2.) Heb. ‘ish, like the Latin vir and Greek aner, denotes properly a man in opposition to a woman (1 Sam. 17:33;

→ CREATED Ge 1:26,27; 2:7; 5:1,2; De 4:32; Job 4:17; 10:2,3,8,9; 31:15; 33:4; 35:10; Ps 8:5; 100:3; 119:73; 138:8; 139:14; Ec 7:29; Isa 17:7; 42:5; 43:7; 45:12; 64:8; Jer 27:5; Zec 12:1; Mal 2:10; Mr 10:6; Heb 2:7

See CREATED IN THE IMAGE OF GOD, below

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
59%man
man59% · 328×men33% · 185×a man2% · 13×other renderings6% · 33×

559 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 21 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject43%adverbial24%object17%predicate9%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 548 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenκοινόωI make unclean, ἀπό
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
εἰςπρόςδέbut, on the othe
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oλέγωI say, speak
ἐκ
DisjλέγωI say, speakεἰμίI am, exist
ἐγώ
γάρforὅτιthat, since, becΠαῦλοςPaul
ἄνθρωποςA man548×
what comes after →
Article the
δέbut, on the otheπατήρfather, Father, Article the
οὗτος
ὅςδίκαιοςjust, righteous,καίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
ὑπόκαίand, even, also,Article the
ἐν
Article theμαλακόςsoft, effeminateπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἄνθρωπος · 548× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Mark Acts 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation Galatians 1 Timothy Hebrews Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 708 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 25c. AD 40

τὴν γοῦν ἀνθρώπου γένεσιν ἀναγράφων ἐν τοῖς ἔπειτα διαρρήδην ὁμολογεῖ, ὡς ἄρα κατ’ εἰκόνα θεοῦ διετυπώθη (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.16c. AD 75–95

γέγονε γὰρ πρὸ ἐτῶν δισχιλίων, ἐφʼ ὅσον πλῆθος αἰῶνος οὐδʼ αὐτῶν οἱ ποιηταὶ τὰς γενέσεις τῶν θεῶν, μήτι γε τὰς τῶν ἀνθρώπων πράξεις ἢ τοὺς νόμους ἀνενεγκεῖν ἐτόλμησαν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.1c. AD 100

οὐ ταύτην τὴν νηστείαν ἐγὼ ἐξελεξάμην, λέγει κύριος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπον ταπεινοῦντα τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59301Philadelphia (Arsinoites)251 BC

Ψύχεως. καλῶς ἂν οὖν ποιήσαις διέμενος αὐτόν, καθὰ ἐν πόλει μοι ἐπηγγείλω. ἔστιν γὰρ ἄνθρωπος ἡμῖν χρήσιμος. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους λϛ, Παχώνς.

P.Giss. 1 39Theben206 BC–181 BC

ἀεὶ χρόνου. ἐὰν δέ τίς σοι ἐπέλθηι ἔκ τε τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὀνόματος ἢ ἄλλου ἀνθρώπου, ἀνεπιεικὲς ἐκστήσω αὐτὸν ἀπὸ σοῦ περὶ αὐτῶν καὶ βεβαιώσω σοι αὐτὰ ἀπὸ συναλλαγμάτων καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

ντων ὑμῶν διαλήψεως … καὶ οὐδὲ μέχρι τοῦ νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα … θαι ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
τιςtis certain G5100 Indefinite pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
529× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing in a general sense, as seen in Luke 9:49 and John 11:1. It can mean someone, anyone, or anything. This term is often used to describe an unspecified individual or object.
Tyndale gloss
one
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τὶς is an enclitic indefinite pronoun meaning 'someone' or 'something.' It can refer to a certain person or object and appears in both singular and plural forms, such as τινός and τινες. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, including Luke 9:49 and Acts 5:25. It is related to the interrogative pronoun τίς, indicating its flexible use in questions and statements.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τις, neut., τι, gen., τινός,

enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε.

As subst.,

one, a certain one: Lk 9:49, Jo 11:1, Ac 5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Lk 13:1, Ac 15:1, Ro 3:8, al.

someone, anyone, something, anything: Mt 12:29, Mk 9:30, Lk 8:46, Jo 2:25, Ac 17:25, Ro…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τὶς, τὶ. ἘΣ what follows, εἰ καί lays less emphasis upon it; although it is evident that εἰ καί can often be substituted for καὶ ei.” Cf. Herm. Vig. p. 829 sq.; W. 444 (413); Ellic. on Phil. ii. 17; Schmalfeld, Griech. Syntax, § 41; Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 31]. 8. εἰ μή, a. in a conditional protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses as the simple εἰ, see 1. above, if not, unless, except, [W. 477 (444) sqq.; B. 345 (297)]: Mt. xxiv. 22; Jn. ix. 33; | xv. 22, 24; Ro. vii. 7, ete. b. it serves, with the entire. following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been said, only, save that, (Lat. nisi quod), [B. 359 (308) ]: Mk. vi. 5; 1 Co. vii. 17 (where Paul by the addition εἰ μὴ ἑκάστῳ κτλ. strives to prevent any one in applying what had been said a little while before, viz. οὐ δεδούλωται . . ἐν τοιούτοις to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironical answers, unless…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τις (indef. pron.), ‘* someone, something’’: P Vat ΑἸ (B.c. 168) (= UPZi. p. 303) πᾶς τις πειρᾶται. . ., P Lond 421° (B.C. 168) (= Selections, p. 10) εἰς πᾶν τι ἐληλυθυῖα διὰ, τὴν τοῦ σίτου τιμήν, ‘having come to the last extremity because of the high price of corn,’’ P Oxy IV. 7421° (B.c. 2) ἐάν τι δύνῃ... δὸς ἐργασίαν, “if you can, give your attention to it’’ (Edd.), 2d. I. 120% (iv/a.D.) τινα ὁρῶντα αἱαυτὸν (/. ἑαυτὸν) ἐν δυστυχίᾳ, ““α man finding himself in adversity,’ 13 ἀποστῖλόν pot τινα ἢ Γοῦνθον ἢ ᾿Αμμώνιον, “send someone to me, either Gunthus or Ammonius” (Edd.). P Oxy VI. 937°" (ili/A.D.) γ]ράψον ἐκεῖ TO kat’ εἶδος ὅτι τι kal τι εἴληφας is translated by the editors ‘* write the list there, that you have received so and so.” They 3) ες remark that it is simpler to take τι καί τι as analogous to τὸ καὶ τό than ‘‘to take τί kal τί as an indirect interrogative, ὅτι being…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τις (tis) — one.

τις,

τι, Indef. pronoun any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions see below):—but τί; τί; Interrog. pronoun who? what?, oxytone in the monosyllable cases, paroxytone in the others:—Dialectal forms: [Refs 5th c.AD+] σις (si se) [Refs 4th c.AD+] σις (with ?? for σ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Thess. κις [Refs], neuter κι in διεκί, ποκκί (which see); neuter plural Doric dialect σά, Boeotian dialect τά, Aeolic dialect dative τίω, τίοισι (see. infr. B). (I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] q[uglide]i-, cf. Latin quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, see at {ἄσσα}, σά μά; with τέο (see. infr. B) cf. OSlav. genitive česo)

__A Indef. pronoun τις, τι, genitive Ionic dialect τεο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τευ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect του [Refs 5th c.BC+]; του is rare after [NT+4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τὶς

tis

an enclitic indefinite pronoun; some or any person or object:--a (kind

of), any (man, thing, thing at all), certain (thing), divers, he

(every) man, one (X thing), ought, + partly, some (man, -body, -

thing, -what), (+ that no-)thing, what(-soever), X wherewith,

whom(-soever), whose(-soever).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τις, τι

Indef.pr.

any one, some one

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τις tis 534x

enclitic, indefinite pronoun, a certain one, someone, Mt. 12:47; pl. some, certain, several, Lk. 8:2; Acts 9:19; 2 Pet. 3:16; one, a person, Mt. 12:29; Lk. 14:8; Jn. 6:50; combined with the name of an individual, one, Mk. 15:21; as it were in a manner, a kind of, Heb. 10:27; Jas. 1:18; any whatever, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Indef-NSM — Indefinite pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

X-NSM Part of Speech: indefinite pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
27%anyone
anyone27% · 144×some19% · 102×certain17% · 93×anything9% · 48×any9% · 47×one6% · 34×someone4% · 19×something3% · 18×other renderings7% · 37×

542 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 35 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject66%object20%adverbial9%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 530 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἰCond
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὅτιthat, since, bec
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰCondεἰμίI am, existλέγωI say, speak
ἐάνCond
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakἐγώ
μήNeg
ἵναin order that, sἐάνCondβλέπωI look, see
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςΦαρισαῖοςa Phariseeὁδόςa way, road, jou
τὶςcertain529×
what comes after →
Article the
γραμματεύςa scribe, town-cμαθητήςa learner, disciἀπό
σύ
λέγωI say, speakπλανάωI lead astray, dἐρωτάωI ask, question,
αὐτός
ἐκὁράωI see, look uponἀπό
ἐκ
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐνπλούσιοςrichὑδρωπικόςafflicted with d

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτὶς · 529× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John 1 Corinthians Mark 2 Corinthians Hebrews Matthew 1 Timothy Romans James Revelation

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 121 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.5c. AD 100

πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν· μὴ ἐξέστω δὲ τῷ καθόλου ἐπὶ τὴν διαθήκην ταύτην ἄλλῳ τινὶ ἐπέρχεσθαι, εἰ δὲ μὴ ἄκυρον ἔστω καὶ προσαποτεισάτω ὁ ἐπιφέρων ὕστερον … ἄλλον τῆς

P.Cair. Cat. 10364 descr.Pathyris126 BC–102 BC

προγεγραμμένου ἵππου, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαί σοι ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ. ἐὰν δὲ ἐπέλθωμεν ἢ ἄλλος τις ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἥ τʼ ἔφοδος ἄκυρος ἔσται καὶ προσαποτείσομέν σοι χαλκοῦ τάλαντα πέντε.

BGU 6 1260Pathyris102 BC

σημαινομένης ἀρούρης μιᾶς , καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσασθαι Νεχθανοῦπιν καὶ τοὺς τούτου υἱοὺς μηδʼ ἄλλον τινὰ τῶν παρʼ αὐτῶν ἐπὶ τὸν Πετεαρσεμθεία μηδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον τινὰ τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
κατέβαινενkatabainō was going down G2597 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
82× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To come or go down, like Jesus coming down from heaven in John 3:13. It can also mean to fall down, as in Matthew 8:1. This verb is used to describe physical or spiritual descent.
Amplified meaning
traveling, descending
Tyndale gloss
to come/go down
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καταβαίνω (katabaino) means to go or come down, and it is built from the prefix κατά meaning 'down' and a root related to 'to step.' It covers a range of meanings from literal descent to metaphorical uses, appearing frequently in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 8:1 and Acts 10:11. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατα-βαίνω,

[in LXX chiefly for ירד;]

to go or come down, descend.

Of persons: Mt 3:16 24:17, Lk 2:51 6:17 10:31 17:31 19:5, 6, Jo 4:47, 49, 51 5:7, Ac 7:34 8:15 10:20 20:10 23:10 24:1, 22, Eph 4:10; seq. ἀπό, Mt 8:1 14:29 27:40, 42, Mk 3:22 15:30, Lk 10:30, Jo 6:38, Ac 25:7, I Th 4:16; ἐκ, Mt 17:9; ἐκ τ. οὐρανοῦ,

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καταβαίνω (z.c. 118) κατὰ μηδεμίαν παρεύρεσι (= -σιν), “on no pretext whatsoever,” 20.871 (B.c. 118) κατὰ τοῦτο, ‘‘on this account,” ‘in consequence,” 7. 11. 3814 (A.D. 123) (= Selections, p. 78) ἕτερα καθ’ ὃν δήποτε οὖν τρόπον, ‘other things of whatsoever kind,” P Lond 9045) (Α.}. 104) (= Ill. p. 125, Selections, p. 73) καθ᾽ ἥντινα] ϑήποτε αἰτ[ίαν (cf. 2 Macc 143, 3 Macc 77), and P Tebt I. 425 (c. B.c. 114) ἠδικημένος καθ᾽ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπ[ὸ] ᾿Αρμιύσιος, “having been excessively wronged by Harmiusis.’’ The marriage contract P Eleph 15 (B.c. 311-10) (= Se/ections, p. 2) εἶναι δὲ ἡμᾶς κατὰ ταὐτὸ ὅπου ἂν δοκῆι ἄριστον εἶναι, ‘and that we should live together wherever it may seem best” supports the rendering of κατὰ τὸ αὐτό in Ac 144 AV, RV. On the other hand, the meaning s¢mi/zter, ‘‘after the same manner,” preferred by Blass ad Z., and adopted for κατὰ τὰ αὐτά in Lk 172° RV, is found in the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καταβαίνω (katabainō) — to come/go down.

καταβαίνω,

Doric dialect κᾰβαίνω [Refs 7th c.BC+]: future -βήσομαι[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect -βέβηκ; Boeotian dialect participle καταβεβάων [Refs]: aorist κατέβην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; poetry 3rd.pers. plural κατέβαν [LXX+8th c.BC+], Laconian dialect κάβασι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect 1st pers. plural subjunctive καταβήομεν (variant{-βείομεν}) [Refs 8th c.BC+]; late 3rd.pers. singular optative κατάβοι [LXX+1st c.BC+]; poetry participle καββάς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect infinitive καταβήμεναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, Epic dialect aorist 1 κατεβήσετο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative καταβήσεο [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—go or come down from.., with genitive, πόλιος κ. [Refs]; οὐρανόθεν κ[Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Preps., ἐξ ὄρεος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. Ἀΐδαν, Ἀΐδα δόμον, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (later absolutely, die, [Refs 4th c.AD+]; ἔσω κ. [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καταβαίνω

katabaino

from 2596 and the base of 939; to descend (literally or

figuratively):--come (get, go, step) down, fall (down).

see GREEK for 2596

see GREEK for 939

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καταβαίνω

v.

I go down, come down

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καταβαίνω katabainō 81x

to come or go down, descend, Mt. 8:1; 17:9; to lead down, Acts 8:26; to come down, fall, Mt. 7:25, 27; to be let down, Acts 10:11; 11:5

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καταβαίνω fut. -βήσομαι perf. -βέβηκα aor2 κατέβην poet. 3rd pl. κατέβαν imperat. κατάβηθι or κατάβα epic 1st pl. subj. καταβείομεν epic 1st pl. subj. καταβείομεν for -βῶμεν Mid., epic 3rd sg. aor1 κατεβήσετο imperat. καταβήσεο to step down, go or come down, Lat. descendere, ἐξ ὄρεος from the mountain, Il.; κ. πόλιος to go down from the city, id. Il.; κ. δίφρου to dismount from the chariot, id. Il.; c. acc. loci, θάλαμον κατεβήσετο she came down to her chamber, Od.:—but also c. acc., κατέβαιν᾽ ὑπερώϊα she came down from the upper floor, id. Od.; κλίμακα κατεβήσετο came down the ladder, id. Od.; absol. to come down stairs, Ar.; hence in Pass., ἵππος καταβαίνεται the horse is dismounted from, Xen.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-IAI-3S — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
16%descending
descending16% · 13×having come down9% · 7×going down6% · 5×having descended6% · 5×came down6% · 5×coming down6% · 5×went down4% · 3×having gone down4% · 3×other renderings44% · 36×

82 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 33 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb95%adverbial5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 82 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἔρχομαιI come, goθεόςGod, a godἀφυπνόωI fall asleep
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaven
Article theἐκ
Article the
εἰμίI am, existἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fὁδόςa way, road, jou
μήNeg
δῶμαthe top of the hοἰκίαa house, househo
θεόςGod, a god
πνεῦμαwind, breath, spσάλπιγξa trumpet
καταβαίνωwas going down82×
what comes after →
ἐκ
Article theοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
ἀπό
Article theἹεροσόλυμαPropοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
εἰς
Article theαὐτόςΚαφαρναούμProp
Article the
βροχήa heavy rainπνεῦμαwind, breath, spυἱόςa son, descenden
καίand, even, also, nam
ὑποδέχομαιI receive as a gμένωI remain, abideἰάομαιI heal

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαταβαίνω · 82× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Matthew Revelation Mark Ephesians 1 Thessalonians James Romans
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 144 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 117c. AD 40

Ἐπεὶ δ’ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανίων τὰ ἐπίγεια ἤρτηται κατά τινα φυσικὴν συμπάθειαν, ὁ τῆς ἑβδομάδος λόγος ἄνωθεν ἀρξάμενος κατέβη καὶ πρὸς ἡμᾶς τοῖς θνητοῖς γένεσιν ἐπιφοιτήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.24c. AD 75–95

Μωυσῆς δὲ τοῦ θεοῦ ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας καταβαίνει πρὸς τὸ πλῆθος·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD

ὁ νεανίσκος· καὶ σπεῖρον τῆι β τοῦ Ἁθὺρ διὰ σοῦ καὶ ἐγὼ δʼ αὐτὸς καταβαίνω πρὸ τοῦ Ἦλιν· καὶ ὡς οὐ μὴ ἀμελήσῃς, παρὰ πάντα δὲ ἐπιμέλου σαυτοῦ ἵνʼ

O.Did. 331DidymoiAD 77–AD 92

ἠρώτηκάς με περὶ τοῦ κορασίου, νῦν δὲ ἀμερίμνει· ἄν πληρώσῃ τὰ ἡμέρια … … καταβήσεται … δε παρα … οὐδεν … τουτ … κα

ἀκούσῃς περὶ Θερμουθᾶτος πέμψον μοι φάσιν. ἐρωτῶ σε, οὐ πρᾶγμά ἐστιν, ἐάν τινα εὕρητε καταβαίνοντα, ἀποστεῖλαι ἡμῖν φάσιν περὶ τῆς ὑγιείας ὑμῶν καὶ τῆς μικρᾶς. ἐρωτῶ σε καὶ παρακαλῶ,

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ἀπὸapo from G575 Preposition
647× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means moving away from something, like a place or a time. It's used in many parts of the Bible, like Matthew 5:29 and Luke 5:2, to show movement or separation. It can also mean because of something.
Tyndale gloss
away from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),

prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),

[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]

from (i.e. from the exterior).

Of separation and cessation;

of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;

in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;

of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπό (apo) — away from.

ἀπό,

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit

__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπό

apo

a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various

senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X

here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),

from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as

a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,

completion, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπό

Prep.

from, away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπό apo 646x

pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.

prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.

of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.

of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.

in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.

OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.

OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%from
from82% · 556×of7% · 48×by3% · 22×other renderings8% · 51×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%subject5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, cἀπόλαόςa people, the cr
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existτρεῖςthreeδεκατέσσαρεςfourteen
Article the
τὶςγινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus
ἐγώ
ὥστεso that, therefoκαθαρίζωI make cleanῥύομαιI rescue
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind
καίand, even, also,ἔλεοςpity, mercyμετά
ἀπόfrom647×
what comes after →
Article the
ΓαλιλαίαGalileeθεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
σύ
καίand, even, also,συμφέρωI collect, am prκαλόςbeautiful, good,
θεόςGod, a god
πατήρfather, Father, ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἔρχομαιI come, go
ἀρχήruler, beginning
ἵναin order that, sκτίσιςcreation, creatuArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπό · 647× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark John Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ἸερουσαλὴμHierousalēm Jerusalem G2419 Noun · proper name, indeclinable
76× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Jerusalem is the capital of Palestine, an important city in the Bible. It's mentioned in Matthew 2:3 and many other places, often as a center of worship and faith.
Amplified meaning
the holy city, the capital of Palestine
Tyndale gloss
Jerusalem
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The word Ἱεροσόλυμα (i.e. Jerusalem) is a proper noun of Hebrew origin, referring to the capital of Palestine. It appears in various forms in the New Testament, with Ἱερουσαλήμ being the indeclinable form used most frequently. The lexicons note its symbolic significance in verses like Galatians 4:25-26 and Hebrews 12:22, where it represents both the earthly city and a heavenly counterpart.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἱερουσαλήμ, v.s. Ἱεροσόλυμα.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Ἱεροσόλυμα [WH Ἴερ.. see their Intr. § 408], -ων, τά, (the invariable form in Mk. and Jn., almost everywhere in Mt. ana Joseph. [e. Ap. 1, 22, 13, ete.; Philo, leg. ad Gaium ὃ 36; (ef. Polyb. 16, 39, 4); al.]), and Ἱερουσαλήμ [WH.lep. (see ref. u. s.)], 7, indecl., (the invariable form in the Sept. [Josh. x. 1, ete.; Philo de somn. ii. 39 init. ; so Aristot. in Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 22, 7 (where see Miiller)]; in the N. T. where a certain sacred emphasis, so to speak, resides in the very name, as Gal. iv. 25 sq. [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; Heb. xii. 22; Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2, 10; thus in direct address: Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; both forms are used promiscuously [yet with a marked preference for the indeclinable form] in the O. T. Apocr., and in the writ. of Luke and of Paul; [cf. Tdf Proleg. p- 119; WH. App. p. 160]. Whether there is also a third and unusual form Ἱεροσόλυμα, -ης, ἡ, in…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἱερουσαλήμ (Hierousalēm) — Jerusalem.

Ἱερουσαλήμ, see: Ἱεροσόλυμα - (WH, Ἰερ-, see Intr., § 408), -ων, τά (on πᾶσα Ἱ., Mat.2:3, see WM, 794; M, Pr., 48, 244; Thayer, see word), and Ἱερουσαλήμ (WH, Ἰερ-), ἡ., indecl., as always in LXX exc. some parts of Apocr.. (Heb. יְרוּשָׁלִַם), the former always in FlJ, Mk, Jo EV. and Mt (except. Mat.27:37), and most frequently in Lk, the latter always in He, Re, and by St. Paul (except. Gal.1:17-18 2:1),

Jerusalem: Mat.2:1, Mrk.3:8, Jhn.1:19, al.; its…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἱεροσόλυμα

Hierousalem

of Hebrew origin (3389); Hierusalem (i.e. Jerushalem), the capitol of

Palestine:--Jerusalem. Compare 2414.

see GREEK for 2414

see HEBREW for 03389

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἱερουσαλήμ, ἡ

Prop.n.

Jerusalem

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Ἰερουσαλήμ Ierousalēm 77x

Jerusalem, pr. name, indecl., also spelled Ἱεροσόλυμα   62x in our text. See PhotoGuide.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-PRI — Noun · proper name, indeclinable
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-PRI Indeclinable PRoper Noun

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

je-roo'-sa-lem:

I. THE NAME

1. In Cuneiform

2. In Hebrew

3. In Greek and Latin

4. The Meaning of Jerusalem

5. Other Names

II. GEOLOGY, CLIMATE AND SPRINGS

1. Geology

2. Climate and Rainfall

3. The Natural Springs

III. THE NATURAL SITE

1. The Mountains Around

2. The Valleys

3. The Hills

IV. GENERAL TOPOGRAPHY OF JERUSALEM

1. Description of Josephus

2. Summary of the Names of the Five Hills

3. The Akra

4. The Lower City

5. City of David and Zion

V. EXCAVATIONS AND ANTIQUITIES

1. Robinson

2. Wilson, and the Palestine Exploration Fund (1865)

3. Warren and Conder

4. Maudslay

5. Schick

6. Clermont-Ganneau

7. Bliss and Dickie

8. Jerusalem Archaeological Societies

VI. THE CITY'S WALLS AND GATES

1. The Existing Walls

2. Wilson's Theory

3. The Existing Gates

4. Buried Remains of Earlier Walls

5. The Great Dam of the Tyropoeon

6. Ruins of Ancient Gates

7. Josephus' Description of the Walls

8. First Wall

9. Second Wall

10. Third Wall

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Jerusalem

Called also Salem, Ariel, Jebus, the “city of God,” the “holy city;” by the modern Arabs el-Khuds, meaning “the holy;” once “the city of Judah” (2 Chr. 25:28). This name is in the original in the dual form, and means “possession of peace,” or “foundation of peace.” The dual form probably refers to the two mountains on which it was built, viz., Zion and Moriah; or, as some suppose, to the two parts of the city, the “upper” and the “lower city.” Jerusalem is a “mountain city enthroned on a mountain fastness” (comp. Ps. 68:15, 16; 87:1; 125:2; 76:1, 2; 122:3). It stands on the edge of one of the highest table-lands in Palestine, and is surrounded on the south-eastern, the southern, and the western sides by deep and precipitous ravines.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(the habitation of peace), Jerusalem stands in latitude 31 degrees 46’ 35" north and longitude 35 degrees 18’ 30" east of Greenwich. It is 32 miles distant from the sea and 18 from the Jordan, 20 from Hebron and 36 from Samaria. "In several respects," says Dean Stanley, "its situation is singular among the cities of Palestine. Its elevation is remarkable; occasioned not from its being on the summit of one of the numerous hills of Judea, like most of the towns and villages, but because it is on the edge of one of the highest table-lands of the country. Hebron indeed is higher still by some hundred feet, and from the south, accordingly (even from Bethlehem), the approach to Jerusalem is by a slight descent. But from any other side the ascent is perpetual; and to the traveller approaching the city from the east or west it must always have presented the appearance beyond any other capital…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The chief city of the Holy Land, and to the Christian the most illustrious in the world. It is situated in 31 degrees 46’43" N. lat., and 35 degrees 13’ E. long. on elevated ground south of the center of the country, about thirty-seven miles from the Mediterranean, and about twenty-four from the Jordan. Its site was early hallowed by God’s trial of Abraham’s faith, Ge 22:1-24 2Ch 3:1. It was on the border of the tribes of Benjamin and Judah, mostly within the limits of the former, but reckoned as belonging to the latter, because conquered by it, Jos 15:8 18:16,28 Jud 1:18. The most ancient name of the city was Salem, Ge…

Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 367 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn Dreams 2.250c. AD 40

ἡ δὲ θεοῦ πόλις ὑπὸ Ἑβραίων Ἱερουσαλὴμ καλεῖται, ἧς μεταληφθὲν τοὔνομα ὅρασίς ἐστιν εἰρήνης.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.180c. AD 75–95

τὴν μέντοι Σολυμᾶ ὕστερον ἐκάλεσεν Ἱεροσόλυμα.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 41.2c. AD 96

οὐ πανταχοῦ, ἀδελφοί, προσφέρονται θυσίαι ἐνδελεχισμοῦ ἢ εὐχῶν ἢ περὶ ἁμαρτίας καὶ πλημμελείας, ἀλλ̓ ἢ ἐν Ἱερουσαλὴμ μόνῃ: κἀκεῖ δὲ οὐκ ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ προσφέρεται, ἀλλ̓ ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ ναοῦ πρὸς τὸ θυσιαστήριον, μωμοσκοπηθὲν τὸ προσφερόμενον διὰ τοῦ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 8th c. AD
P. Murabba'ât 2 114MurabaatAD 70–AD 132

Τίτου Στατιλίου Σεουήρου πρὸ η εἰδῶν Ἰουλίων Πανέμου ὀγδόῃ καὶ δεκάτῃ … ἐν Ἱεροσολύμᾳ … αυουαια … Ὀρεινῆς προς … λεγεῶνος δεκάτης Φρετηνσίας ἑκατονταρχίας … νιου Σατορνείνου

P.Ross.Georg. 4 4Aphrodites Kome (Antaiopolites)AD 710

δυναμένους ἀνθέξεσθαι τῷ ἔργῳ ἀπόστειλον διʼ ἀποκρισιαρίου σου ὅπως ἐξέλθωσιν διὰ στράτας εἰς αὐτὰ Ἱεροσόλυμα παρασκευάζων πληρωθῆναι αὐτοὺς τοὺς μισθοὺς καὶ τὴν ἀποτροφὴν αὐτῶν ἀποστέλλων τὸ χρυσίον τῆς δαπάνης

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
εἰςeis to G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςto1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ἸεριχὼHierichō Jericho G2410 Noun · proper name, indeclinable
7× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Jericho was an important city in Palestine, mentioned in Matthew 20:29 and Mark 10:46. It's a place where Jesus walked and taught, and its history is still celebrated today.
Amplified meaning
a city in Palestine, near the Jordan River
Tyndale gloss
Jericho
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Ἰεριχώ (transliterated as Hierichō) refers to Jericho, a significant city in Palestine known for its fertility and fragrant products. It appears in several New Testament passages, including Matthew, Mark, and Luke. The word is indeclinable and has Hebrew origins, specifically from יְרִיחוֹ.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἰερειχώ (T, Ἱερ-; Rec. Ἱεριχώ; cf. Bl., § 3, 4, 4; WH, App., 155), ἡ, indecl. (Heb. יְרִיחוֹ, יְרֵחוֹ),

Jericho: Mt 20:29, Mk 10:46, Lk 10:30 18:35 19:1, He 11:30.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Ἱεριχώ (Tdf. Ἱερειχώ [see his Proleg. p. 85; WH. App. p. 155, ands. v. «+3 WH ἼἸερ. see their Intr. § 408; on its accent in codd. ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 1087), ἡ. indecl. (on its declens. in other writ. cf. W. § 10, 2; in Strabo Ἱερικούς -οὔντος ; Ἱεριχοῦς, -odvros in Joseph., ef. W.1.c¢.; Hebr. ἡ", fr. ΤῊ Ἢ to smell, so called from its fertility in aromatics), Jericho, a noted city, abounding in balsam [i. e. perh. the opobalsamum; ef. Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 337; B. Ὁ. s. v. Balm], honey, cyprus [prob. Arab. “el-henna”; ef. Tristram u. s., s. v. Camphire], myrobalanus [ Arab. “zukkum”’], roses, and other fragrant productions. It was situated not far from the northern shore of the Dead Sea, in the tribe of Benjamin, between the city of Jerusalem and the river Jordan, 150 stadia from the former and 60 from the latter. Joseph. b. j- 4, 8, 3 calls its territory θεῖον χωρίον. It is…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἱεριχώ (Hierichō) — Jericho.

Ἰερειχώ (T, Ἱερ-; Rec. Ἱεριχώ; cf. Bl., § 3, 4, 4; WH, App., 155), ἡ indecl. (Heb. יְרִיחוֹ),

Jericho: Mat.20:29, Mrk.10:46, Luk.10:30 18:35 19:1, Heb.11:30.†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἰεριχώ

Hiericho

of Hebrew origin (3405); Jericho, a place in Palestine:--Jericho.

see HEBREW for 03405

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἰεριχώ, ἡ

Prop.n.

Jericho

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰδωλόθυτος eidōlothutos 9x

as a noun meat offered to an idol, Acts 15:29; 21:25; 1 Cor. 8:1, 4, 7, 10; 10:19; Rev. 2:14, 20*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-PRI — Noun · proper name, indeclinable
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-PRI Indeclinable PRoper Noun

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

jer'-i-ko (the word occurs in two forms. In the Pentateuch, in 2Ki 25:5 and in Ezra, Nehemiah, Chronicles it is written yerecho; yericho, elsewhere): In 1Ki 16:34 the final Hebrew letter is he (h), instead of waw (w). The termination waw (w) thought to preserve the peculiarities of the old Canaanite. dialect. In the Septuagint we have the indeclinable form, Iericho (Swete has the form Iereicho as well), both with and without the feminine article; in the New Testament Iereicho, once with the feminine article The Arabic is er-Riha. According to De 32:49 it stood opposite Nebo, while in 34:3 it is called a city grove of palm trees. It was surrounded with a wall (Jos 2:15)…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Jericho

Place of fragrance, a fenced city in the midst of a vast grove of palm trees, in the plain of Jordan, over against the place where that river was crossed by the Israelites (Josh. 3:16). Its site was near the ‘Ain es-Sultan, Elisha’s Fountain (2 Kings 2:19-22), about 5 miles west of Jordan. It was the most important city in the Jordan valley (Num. 22:1; 34:15), and the strongest fortress in all the land of Canaan. It was the key to Western Palestine.

This city was taken in a very remarkable manner by the Israelites (Josh. 6). God gave it into their hands. The city was “accursed” (Heb. herem, “devoted” to Jehovah), and accordingly (Josh. 6:17; comp.

(place of fragrance), a city of high antiquity, situated in a plain traversed by the Jordan, and exactly over against where that river was crossed by the Israelites under Joshua. (Joshua 3:16) It was five miles west of the Jordan and seven miles northwest of the Dead Sea. It had a king. Its walls were so considerable that houses were built upon them. ch. (Joshua 2:15) The spoil that was found in it betokened its affluence. Jericho is first mentioned as the city to which the two spies were sent by Joshua from Shittim. (Joshua 2:1-21) It was bestowed by him upon the tribe of Benjamin, ch. (Joshua 18:21) and from this time a long interval elapses before Jericho appears again…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A city of Benjamin, Jos 16:7 18:21, about eighteen miles east north east of Jerusalem, and seven miles from the Jordan. It was the first city in Canaan taken by Joshua, who being miraculously aided by the downfall of its walls, totally destroyed it, sparing only Rahab and her household, and pronounced a curse upon the person who should ever rebuild it, which was more than five hundred years afterwards fulfilled on Hiel, Jos 6:26 1Ki 16:34. Meanwhile a new Jericho had been built on some neighboring site, Jud 3:3 2Sa 10:5. Jericho was also called the "city of palm-trees," De…

Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome
Clement of RomeFirst Clement 12.2c. AD 96

ἐκπεμφθέντων γὰρ ὑπὸ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ τοῦ Ναυὴ κατασκόπων εἰς τὴν Ἱεριχώ, ἔγνω ὁ βασιλεὺς τῆς γῆς, ὅτι ἥκασιν κατασκοπεῦσαι τὴν χώραν αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐξέπεμψεν ἄνδρας τοὺς συλλημψομένους αὐτούς, ὅπως συλλημφθέντες θανατωθῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
5th c. AD
ZPE 199 (2016), p. 155-169Panopolis ? (PanopolitesAD 401–AD 500

Ταφνάειν Πεντάσχοινος Πικάσπισως Ὀστρακίνη Ῥινοκούρουρα Τὰ Βιτύλια Ῥαφία Γάσα Ἀσκάλων Ἐλευθερόπολις Αἰλία - Ἱεροσαλήμ Ἱεριχώ Διόσπολις Ἰόππε Καισάρεια Φιλίππου

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
λῃσταῖςlēstēs robbers G3027 Noun · dative · plural · masculine
15× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A robber or rebel is someone who takes things by force, as seen in Matthew 21:13 and 26:55. This word is also used to describe the thieves crucified with Jesus, highlighting the contrast between their actions and Jesus' innocence.
Amplified meaning
thieves, rebels, those who take by force
Tyndale gloss
robber/rebel
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λῃστής refers to a robber or brigand, often implying violence or plunder. It is derived from the verb ληΐζομαι, meaning to plunder. This term appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including Matthew and John, where it contrasts with κλέπτης, which denotes a thief who steals stealthily. The lexicons note that λῃστής can also refer to pirates or freebooters.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — κλέπτης, λῃστής from a scan

THESE words occur together John x. 1, 8; but do not constitute there! or elsewhere a tautology, or mere rhetorical amplification (cf. Obad. 5; Plato, Rep. i. 851 c). The κλέπτης and the λῃστής alike appropriate what is not theirs, but the κλέπτης by fraud and in secret (Matt. xxiv. 43; John xii. 6; ef. Exod. xxii. 2; Jer. 11. 26); the λῃστής by violence and openly (2 Cor. xi. 26 ; cf. Hos. vii. 1; Jer. vii. 11; Plutarch, De Superst. 8: οὐ φοβεῖται λῃστὰς 6 οἰκουρῶν) ; the one is the ‘thief’ and steals; the other is the ‘robber’ and plunders, as his name, from ληΐς or λεία (as our own ‘robber,’ from ‘Raub,’ booty), sufficiently declares. They are severally the ‘fur’ and ‘latro;’ ‘fures insidiantur et occulta fraude decipiunt ; datrones audacter aliena diripiunt’ (Jerome, In Osee, vii. 1). ‘Larron,’ however, in French, ‘voleur qui dérobe furtivement et par adresse,’ notwithstanding its…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λῃστής, -οῦ, ὁ

(< Ep. ληίς = λεία, booty),

[in LXX for גְּדוּד, etc.;]

a robber, brigand: Mt 21:13(LXX) 26:55 27:38, 44, Mk 11:17 14:48 15:27, Lk 10:30, 36 19:46 22:52, Jo 10:1, 8 18:40, II Co 11:26.†

SYN.: κλέπτης, q.v.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λῃστής, -οῦ, 6, (for ληϊστής fr. ληΐζομαι, to plunder, and this fr. Ion. and Epic Ayis, for which the Attics use λεία, booty), [fr. Soph. and Hdt. down], a robber; a plunderer, freebooter, brigand: Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52; Jn. x. 1; xviii. 40; plur., Mt. xxi. 13; xxvii. 38,44; Mk. xi.17; xv. 27; Lk. x. 30,36; xix. 46; Jn. x.8; 2Co.xi. 26. [Not to be confounded with κλέπτης thief, one who takes property by stealth, (although the distinction is obscured in A. V.); cf. Trench § xliv.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λῃστής. P Petr III. 28 (ε) verso (α}} (iii/B.c.), memoranda relating to criminals, is headed—arrepl ér[LOéoJews ληιστῶν (for form, cf. Mayser Gr. p. 122): cf. P Par 467 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 86) ἐν τοῖς ἀναγκαιοτάτοις καιροῖς ληστῶν ἐπικειμένων, P Lips I. 3725 (a.p. 389) ἑτοιμότατα γὰρ ἔχω ἀπελένξαι ἐν τῷ ἀχρ[άϊντῳ αὐτοῦ δικαστηρίῳ τούτους ληστὰς ὁμολό[γ]ους καὶ ζῶα ἀπελακότας (/. ἀπεληλ.--Ὁ πολλάκις, and the late P Oxy I. 13958 (A.D. 612) ὑποδέξασθαι | ” λιστάς, ‘to have harboured robbers.” For λῃστήριον, “a band of robbers,” cf. P Petr III. 28 (¢)® (iii/B.c.) ἐπέθετο αὐτοῖς ληιστήρ[ιο]ν, P Hamb I. τοῦ (ii/a.p.) ἐπέβη pov ταῖς οἰκίαις. . λῃστήριον, and for the meaning ‘robbers’ lairs,”” cf. Cagnat IV. 2195 τὰ ἐν Ἑλλησπόντῳ ληστήρια. The adj. λῃστίρ)ικός is common, e.g. P Tebt I. 531} (B.c. 110) ἐπιθέμενοι λῃστικῶι τρόπωι, 16. II. 332° (A.D. 176) ἐπῆλθάν τινες λῃστρικῷ τρόπῳ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λῃστής (lēstēs) — robber/rebel.

λῃστ-ής, οῦ, ὁ,

Ionic dialect ληϊστής, Doric dialect λᾳστής, (ληΐς, ληΐζομαι) robber, pirate, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to κλέπτης, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially by sea, buccaneer, later πειρατής, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ληϊστὴς κατεστήκεε Καρχηδονίων he began a course of piracies upon them, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of irregular troops, [Refs]

II. metaphorically, λ. ἐναργὴς τῆς ἐμῆς τυραννίδος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λῃστὰ λογισμοῦ, of love, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

λῃστής

lestes

from leizomai (to plunder); a brigand:--robber, thief.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λῃστής, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a robber, brigand, bandit

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λῃστής lēstēs 15x

a plunderer, robber, highwayman, Mt. 21:13; 26:55; Mk. 11:17; Lk. 10:30; 2 Cor. 11:26; a bandit, brigand, Mt. 27:38, 44; Mk. 15:27; Jn. 18:40; trop. a robber, rapacious imposter, Jn. 10:1, 8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λῃστής λῃστής, οῦ, ληίζομαι a robber, plunderer, Soph., Eur., Xen.; esp. by sea, a pirate, rover, buccaneer, Hdt., Thuc., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPM — Noun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Pr 1:11-16

→ Dens of Jer 7:11

→ Bands of Ho 6:9; 7:1

→ See ROBBERY

→ See THEFT

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%robbers
robbers40% · 6×robber27% · 4×robbers.’20% · 3×robbers?7% · 1×insurrectionist7% · 1×

15 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial33%predicate27%second object20%subject13%object7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 15 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
σπήλαιονa cave, den
ποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
ἐπί
ὡςas, like as, how
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existἸεριχώProp
δύο
αὐτόςσταυρόωI crucify
Article the
καίand, even, also,εἰς
λῃστήςrobbers15×
what comes after →
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come out
μετά
εἷςone
ἐκ
Article the
συσταυρόωI crucify togeth
περιπίπτωI fall into the mids
ὅς
ἀλλάbut, except
οὐNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλῃστής · 15× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark 2 Corinthians
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Special Laws 1.301c. AD 40

οὐκ ἄπλωτα πελάγη δεῖ περαιοῦσθαι καὶ μέσου χειμῶνος κλύδωνι καὶ βίαις ἐναντίων πνευμάτων κλονουμένους ἄνω καὶ κάτω θαλαττεύειν ἢ τραχείας καὶ ἀτριβεῖς πεζεύειν ἀνοδίας, οὐχ ὁδούς, λῃστῶν ἢ θηρίων ἐφόδους ἀεὶ κατεπτηχότας ἢ τειχοφυλακεῖν ἐν ὑπαίθρῳ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 9.183c. AD 75–95

συνέβη δὲ καὶ τότε, λῃστῶν τινων ῥιψάντων εἰς τὸν Ἐλισσαίου τάφον ὃν ἦσαν ἀνῃρηκότες, τὸν νεκρὸν τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ προσκολληθέντα ἀναζωπυρῆσαι.

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 14.1c. AD 96

ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ποιήσωμεν τὸ θέλημα κυρίου, ἐσόμεθα ἐκ τῆς γραφῆς τῆς λεγούσης: Ἐγενήθη ὁ οἶκός μου σπήλαιον λῃστῶν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 7th c. AD 1st c. AD 1st c. BC
P.Köln 3 14731 BC–AD 15

γένηται κατὰ χειμῶνα ἢ πυρὸς ἀπὸ γῆς πάθῃ τὸ πλοῖον ἢ ὑπὸ πολεμίων ἢ λῃστῶν περισπασθῇ ὃ καὶ συμφανὲς καταστήσω. ἐὰν δέ τι τούτων παραβαίνω, ἐκτείσω σοι τά τε

P.Laur. 1 6AD 98–AD 103

ἐὰν μή τις κίνδυνος ἢ βλάβος γένηται ἤτοι ἀπὸ Διὸς βίας αλ … ἢ λῃστῶν ἐφόδου. ἡ ναύλωσις κυρία. ἔτους … Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Νερούα Τραιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ μηνὸς

JJP 18 (1974), p. 184 no. 5ArsinoitesAD 101–AD 300

πεδίῳ … … … ταζαν πλησίον. ὅτε δὲ η … … … ον οἱ λησταὶ … ἐπέβαλον ἡμῖν, οὐκ ἐπέβαλον … τῶν κοίτην, ἔνθεν ὑπενόησα λ … διὰ τοῦτο

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
περιέπεσενperipiptō fell among G4045 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This term means to fall into or among something, like surrounded by troubles. In Luke 10:30, it describes falling among robbers. It emphasizes being surrounded or overwhelmed by something.
Amplified meaning
was attacked, suffered
Tyndale gloss
to fall upon
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

περιπίπτω, or peripipto, means to fall into or upon something that surrounds you. It can refer to encountering situations or people, such as falling among robbers (Lk 10:30) or facing trials (Jas 1:2). The word is formed from the prefix περί (around) and the root πίπτω (to fall). There is a note in the entries about its metaphorical use, particularly in negative contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

περι-πίπτω,

[in LXX: Ru 2:3, II Ki 1:6 (קרה), Pr 11:5 (נפל), Da LXX 2:9, II Mac 6:13 9:7, 21 10:4*;]

to fall around.

to fall in with, light upon, come across: c. dat., λῃσταῖς, Lk 10:30; πειρασμοῖς, Ja 1:2; seq. εἰς, Ac 27:41.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

περι-πίπτω : 2 aor. περιέπεσον ; fr. Hdt. down; so to fall into as to be encompassed by [ef. περί, UT. 1]: λῃσταῖς, among robbers, Lk. x. 30; τοῖς πειρασμοῖς, Jas. i. 2, (αἰκίαις, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51, 2; θανάτῳ, Dan. ii. 9; Diod. 1, 77; νόσῳ, Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 7; συμφορᾷ, ibid. 1,1, 43 τοῖς δεινοῖς, Aesop 79 (110 ed. Halm); ψευδέσι k. ἀσεβέσι δόγμασιν, Orig. in Joann. t. ii. § 2; numerous other exx. in Passow s. v. 1. ο. [L. and S. s. ν. IT. 3]; to which add, 2 Mace. vi.13; x.4; Polyb. 1, 37,1 and 9); els τόπον τινά, upon a certain place, Acts xxvii. 41.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περιπίπτω. For περιπίπτω, “fall in with,” as in all its NT occurrences (Lk 10%; Ac 274%, Jas 17), cf. P Oxy XIV. 163979 (B.c. 73 or 44) ὅπου ἂν τῶι καθόλου περιπίπτῃς ἡμῖν, ‘‘in any place whatsoever where you may encounter us” (Edd.), P Tebt Il. 278% (early i/A.D.) θυμοῦ περιπεσίῖτε( -Ξεῖται), “the will meet with anger,’’ P Ryl I. 28%#° (mmantic—iv/A.D.) ἐὰν δὲ] ὁ ἐχόμενος μερίμναις πολλαῖς περιπεσεῖται καὶ κακοπαθίαις, “1 the next (toe quiver) he will be involved in much anxiety and distress,’’ and from the inserr. Sy// 226 (= 3 495)°® (c. B.C. 230) διότι μεγάλοις διαπτώμασι περιπεσεῖται ἡ πόλις, and the imprecatory formula to prevent violation of tombs as in C. and B. ii. p. 702, No. 636 (A.D. 234) ὃς ἂν κακουργέσι τοῦτο, τοιούταις (!) περιπέσοιτο συμφοραῖς. The word is claimed as medical by Hobart p. 129f., but for its wider usage cf. Wetstein ad Lk /c., Field Motes p- 61, and add…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περιπίπτω (peripiptō) — to fall upon.

περιπίπτω,

future - πεσοῦμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Epic dialect perfect participle feminine περιπεπτηυῖαι [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—fall around, i.e. so as to embrace, τινι [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. fall around, i.e. upon, a weapon, τῷ ξίφει [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. [ζῶναι] πόλοις περιπεπτηυῖαι encircling the poles, Eratosth. [prev. cited]

4. fall over, ἑκατέρωσε [Refs 1st c.AD+]

II. with dative, fall in with, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently of ships meeting at sea, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. μουσικῇ τε καὶ ταῖς μέθαις having encountered them in our discussion. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ὄψις κάμνουσα ἐν τοῖς μικροῖς τοῖς μεγάλοις ἀσμένως π. [Refs 3rd c.AD+]: absolutely, supervene, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

περιπίπτω

peripipto

from 4012 and 4098; to fall into something that is all around, i.e.

light among or upon, be surrounded with:--fall among (into).

see GREEK for 4012

see GREEK for 4098

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περιπίπτω

v.

I fall into the midst of

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περιπίπτω peripiptō 3x

to fall around or upon, to fall in with, Lk. 10:30; to fall into, light upon, Acts 27:41; to be involved in, Jas. 1:2*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

περιπίπτω fut. -πεσοῦμαι aor2 -έπεσον to fall around, so as to embrace, τινί Xen.

to fall around, i. e. upon, a weapon, τῷ ξίφει Ar.

c. dat. to fall in with, Hdt., Xen.; of ships meeting by chance at sea, Hdt., Thuc.

to fall foul of other ships, Hdt.; περὶ ἀλλήλας of one another, id. Hdt.; also, π. περὶ τόπον to be wrecked on a place, id. Hdt.

metaph. to fall in with, fall into, c. dat., π. ἀδίκοισι γνώμῃσι to encounter unjust judgments, id. Hdt.; π. δουλοσύνῃ id. Hdt.; αἰσχρᾷ τύχῃ Eur.; but, ἑωυτῷ περιπίπτειν to be caught in one's own snare, Hdt.; so, τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ λόγοις περιπίπτειν Aeschin.

to change suddenly, Polyb.

to fall on one side, Plut.

περιπίτνω poet. for περιπίπτω

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

AMONG',

AMONGST', preposition [Gr. See Mingle.]

1. In a general or primitive sense, mixed or mingled with; as tares among wheat.

2. Conjoined or associated with, or making part of the number.

Blessed art thou among women. Luke 1:1.

3. Of the number; as, there is not one among a thousand, possessing the like qualities.

{ A‐mong″ , A‐mongst″ , } prep. [OE. amongist, amonges, amonge, among, AS. onmang, ongemang, gemang, in a crowd or mixture. For the ending -st see Amidst. See Mingle.] 1. Mixed or mingled; surrounded by.

They heard,

And from his presence hid themselves among

The thickest trees.

Milton.

2. Conjoined, or associated with, or making part of the number of; in the number or class of.

Blessed art thou among women.

Luke i. 28.

3. Expressing a relation of dispersion, distribution, etc.; also, a relation of reciprocal action.

What news among the merchants?

Shak.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%having fallen
having fallen33% · 1×you may fall into33% · 1×fell among33% · 1×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λῃστήςa robber, brigand, b
καίand, even, also,
πειρασμόςtrial, testing, temp
ὅτανwhen, whensoever
περιπίπτωfell among
what comes after →
ὅς
καίand, even, also,
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰς
ποικίλοςvarious, of differen

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπεριπίπτω · 3× in the New Testament
Acts James Luke
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Abraham 37c. AD 40

ἤδη γὰρ οὐκ εἰς μακρὰν ἐπιμνησθήσεται σοφῶν ἑτέρων, οἳ τὴν ἀρετὴν ἀνανταγώνιστον ἔσχον, οὐ πονηροῖς ἀντεξετασθέντες οὐδ’ ὅτι βελτίους ἐγένοντο τῶν κατ’ αὐτοὺς ἀποδοχῆς καὶ προνομίας ἀξιωθέντες, ἀλλ’ ὅτι φύσιν εὔμοιρον κτησάμενοι διετήρησαν αὐτὴν…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.110c. AD 75–95

τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ κελεύσαντος αὐτοὺς διὰ πολυανθρωπίαν στέλλειν ἀποικίας, ἵνα μὴ στασιάζοιεν πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ἀλλὰ γῆν πολλὴν γεωργοῦντες ἀφθονίας ἀπολαύοιεν τῶν καρπῶν, ὑπὸ ἀμαθίας παρήκουσαν τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ διὰ τοῦτο συμφοραῖς περιπεσόντες ᾔσθοντο τῆς…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC
P.Erasm. 1 2Oxyrhyncha (Arsinoites)153 BC

καὶ Ὥρου τῶν παρʼ ἐμοῦ ἐπερχομένων ἐκ Κροκοδίλων πόλεως εἰς Ὀξύρυγχα περὶ ὥραν θ περιπεσόντες τινὲς λῃσταὶ ἀνὰ μέσον Ἠλευσῖνος καὶ Ὀξυρύγχων τόν τε κιθῶνα ἐξέδυσαν καὶ παρη

PSI 3 172Thinites119 BC

ἱερείων … … μένων πρὸ τῆς θύρας τῆς ὑπαρχούσης μοι οἰκίας, οἷς καὶ περιπεσόντες τ … π … ς … ἀπηλλάγησαν ἔχοντες ὧν ἡ ἀξία χαλκοῦ τάλαντον α

P.Tebt. 1 230 descr.Kerkeosiris? (Arsinoites)126 BC–102 BC

αὐτῶν εἰς φυγὴν ὥρμησαν ὑφελομένων ἡμῶν γαῖσον, καὶ τῆι προκειμένηι ια ὀψίτερον τῆς ὥρας περιπεσόντες Πετοσίρει ἐπικαλουμένωι Δεκάρπωι Ὀννώφριος τῶν ἐκ Τεβτύνεως κατασκοπεύοντι ὧι καὶ μακρόθεν … πα

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
οἳhos, hē who G3739 Relative pronoun · nominative · plural · masculine
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Amplified meaning
the robbers, the attackers
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-NPM — Relative pronoun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-NPM Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςwho1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
καὶkai both G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίboth8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ἐκδύσαντεςekduō having stripped G1562 Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
5× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To strip or take off clothing, as in Matthew 27:28, is what this word means. It can also mean to put off something, like an old habit. The Bible uses it to describe physical and spiritual actions.
Amplified meaning
who stripped him, took his clothing and belongings
Tyndale gloss
to strip
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκδύω (ekduō) means to strip off or take off, particularly clothing. It can be used both actively, as in stripping someone of their garments, and in a middle voice to indicate putting off one's own clothes. The New Testament uses it in passages like Matthew 27:28 and 2 Corinthians 5:4, where it also takes on a figurative sense of shedding the body.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ-δύω

[in LXX chiefly for פָּשַׁט ;]

to take of, strip of, strip: c. acc pers. (sc. clothing), Mt 27:28; c. acc pers. et rei, Mt 27:31, Mk 15:20, Lk 10:30; mid., to put off: fig., of the body, II Co 5:4.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκ-δύω: 1 aor. ἐξέδυσα; 1 aor. mid. ἐξεδυσάμην ; (δύων ; to take off: twa, to strip one of his garments, Mt. xxvii. 28 [ΤΠ WH mrg. evdvc.]; Lk. x. 30; τινά τι (as in Grk. fr. Hom. down), [a thing from a person]: Mt. xxvii. 31; Mk. xy. 20; Mid. to take off from one’s self, to put off one’s raiment, (Xen. Ag. 1, 28; Hell. 3, 4,19); fig. to put off the body, the clothing of the soul, [A. V. be unclothed]: 2 Co. ν. 4; the reading ἐκδυσάμενοι, adopted in vs. 3 by certain crities [e. g. Mill, Tdf. 7, Reiche, al.], is due to a correction by the copyists; see γυμνός, 1 ἃ. [Comp.: ἀπ-εκδύομαι.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκδύω is frequent in the sense of ‘‘strip one of his garments,” as Mt 2778, Lk τοῦθ, e.g. P Lille I. 68 (iii/B.c.) ἐξέδυσαν Χιτῶνα, Ρ Magd 613 (Β.Ο. 221) τά τε πρόβα]τα βεβοσκηκότας κἀμὲ ὑβρικότες καὶ ἐγδεδυκότες, P Fay 1218 ((. Buc. 103) ἐξέδυσαν ὃ περ[ιε]βεβλήμην ἱμάτιον, BGU LV. τοῦτ (B.C. 14) ἐξέδυσαν (sc. ἔμπορον) καὶ περιείλοντο αὐτοῦ πόκους ἐρίων, and from the inscrr. Sy// 80347 (iii/B.c.) ἐδ[όκ]ει αὐτόν viv ὁ θε[δ]ς ἐγδύσας kal γυμνὸν καταστάσας ὀρθὸν κτλ. In the new fragment of a lost Gospel, P Oxy IV. 655%*, in answer to the disciples’ question πότε σε ὀψόμεθα ; the Lord is described as replying—brav ἐκδύσησθε καὶ μὴ aloxuvOqre. . . . ᾿Εἰκδύω is an ex. of a verb which, though perfective already, forms a further perfective ἀπεκδύομαι which, like ἀπέκδυσις (see s.v.), connotes complete stripping of oneself or another in one’s own interest (Col 211,18, 39) : see Moulton G7. ii. §…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκδύω (ekduō) — to strip.

ἐκδύω

(ἐκδύνω [Refs 5th c.BC+]:

I. causal in present ἐκδύω: imperfect ἐξέδυον· future ἐκδύσω: aorist 1 ἐξέδῡσα: late perfect ἐκδέδῠκα [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— take off, strip off, with double accusative person et of things, ἐκ μέν με χλαῖναν ἔδυσαν they stripped me of my cloak, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with accusative only, strip, πάντας ἐ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]

I.2. passive, ἐκδύομαι, aorist 1 ἐξεδύθην [ῠ]: perfect ἐκδέδῠμαι:—to be stripped of a thing, τὸν χιτωνίσκον ἐκδεδύσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, to be stripped, ἐκδυθῆναι [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.3. middle, ἐκδύομαι, Cretan dialect ἐσδ- [Refs]future -δύσομαι: aorist 1 ἐξεδυσάμην:—strip oneself of a thing, put off, τεύχεά τ᾽ ἐξεδύοντο they were putting…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκδύω

ekduo

from 1537 and the base of 1416; to cause to sink out of, i.e.

(specially as of clothing) to divest:--strip, take off from, unclothe.

see GREEK for 1537

see GREEK for 1416

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκδύω

v.

I put off, take off, strip off

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκδύω ekdyō 6x

pr. to go out from; to take off, strip, unclothe, Mt. 27:28, 31; mid. to lay aside, to put off, Mk. 15:20; Lk. 10:30; 2 Cor. 5:3f.*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκδύω and -δύνω imperf. ἐξέδυ_νον aor2 ἐξέδυν perf. ἐκδέδυ_κα Causal in pres. ἐκδύω, imperf. ἐξέδυον, fut. ἐκδύσω, aor1 ἐξέδυ_σα: — to take off, strip off, Lat. exuere, c. dupl. acc. pers. et rei, ἐκ μέν με χλαῖναν ἔδυσαν they stripped me of my cloke, Od.: c. acc. pers. only, to strip him, Xen., etc.

Mid. ἐκδύομαι, aor1 ἐξεδυσάμην: — to strip oneself of a thing, put off, Il., etc.: absol. to put off one's clothes, strip, Ar., Xen.

in pres. ἐκδύνωin same sense as Mid. ἐκδύομαι

to put off, Od., Hdt.

in aor2 ἐξέδυν, perf. ἐκδέδυ_κα, to go or get out of, c. gen., ἐκδὺς μεγάροιο Od.; ἐκδ. τῆς θαλάσσης to emerge from the sea, Plat.

c. acc. to escape, ἐκδῦμεν ὄλεθρον Il.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-NPM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%having stripped
having stripped33% · 2×they took off33% · 2×having put off17% · 1×be unclothed17% · 1×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ὅς
αὐτός
ἐμπαίζωI mock
θέλωI will, wish, desire
οὐNeg
ἐκδύωhaving stripped
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theχλαμύςa short cloakκαίand, even, also,
ἀλλάbut, except
ἐπενδύωI put on over

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκδύω · 5× in the New Testament
Matthew 2 Corinthians Luke Mark
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 19 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Noah's Work as a Planter 110c. AD 40

ἔνιοι δὲ αὐτοδιδάκτῳ τῇ φύσει χρησάμενοι τἀγαθὸν ἐξέδυσαν τῶν ἐνειλημμένων βλαβῶν, καθάπερ ὁ ἀσκητὴς ἐπίκλην Ἰακώβ·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC 1st c. BC
P.Rein. 1 17Hermopolites110 BC

θ ἔτους ἐπιβαλόντες τινὲς λῃστικῷ τρόπωι εἰς τὸν ὑπάρχοντά μοι οἶκον περὶ τὴν αὐτὴν ἐξέδυσαν τοὺς ἐνοικοῦντας καὶ τὰ πρὸς τὴν γεωργικὴν κατασκευὴν καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ ἐν τῶι

P.Fay. 12Theadelphia (Arsinoites105 BC–104 BC

καὶ ἤγαγον μεθʼ ὕβρεως καὶ πληγῶν καὶ συνκλείσαντές με εἰς τὴν Ἀμεννέως τινὸς οἰκίαν ἐξέδυσαν ὃ περιεβεβλήμην ἱμάτιον καὶ τοῦτο ἀπηλλάγησαν ἔχοντες ἐξέντες γυμνόν. εἶθʼ οὕτως μετʼ ἐνδύματος μ

BGU 4 1061Busiris (Herakleopolites)15 BC

φερομένωι ἐν τῆι κατοικίαι ἐπιθέμενοι ληστρικῶι τρόπωι ἐπί τινα ἔμπορον τῶν ἐκ τοῦ Ὀξυρυγχίτου ἐξέδυσαν καὶ περιείλοντο αὐτοῦ πόκους ἐρίων ρν καὶ ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς Αφ, περὶ ὧν καὶ ἐν

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
αὐτὸνautos him G846 Personal pronoun · accusative · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Amplified meaning
wounded him, gave him blows
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-ASM — Personal pronoun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-ASM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςhim5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
πληγὰςplēgē wounds G4127 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
22× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means a blow, wound, or plague, like the wounds Jesus received, as seen in Revelation 13:3. It can also mean a calamity or disaster. In the Bible, it's used to describe physical harm or suffering.
Tyndale gloss
plague/blow/wound
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πληγή (plēgē) means a blow, stripe, or wound, derived from the verb πλήσσω (plēssō). It can also refer to a calamity or plague, particularly in a metaphorical sense. This term appears in several New Testament passages, including Luke 10:30 and Revelation 9:20, where it conveys both physical and figurative meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πληγή, ῆς, ἡ

(< πλήσσω),

[in LXX chiefly for מַכָּה, also for מַגֶּפָה etc.;]

a blow, stripe, wound: pl., Lk 10:30 12:48, Ac 16:23, 33, II Co 6:5 11:23; ἡ π. τ. θανάτου (RV, death-stroke), Re 13:3, 12; τ. μαχαίρας, Re 13:14.

Metaph., a calamity, plague: Re 9:18, 20 11:6 15:1, 6, 8 16:9, 21 18:4, 8 21:9 22:18.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πληγή, -ῆς, ἧ, (πλήσσω), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 137, also for 7539 ; 1. a blow, stripe: plur., Lk. x. 30; xii. 48; Acts xvi. 23,33; 2 Co. vi.5; xi. 23; a wound: ἡ πληγὴ τοῦ θανάτου, deadly wound [R. V. death-stroke], Rey. xiii. 3, 12; τῆς μαχαίρας, wound made by a sword [sword-stroke], Rey. xiii. 14. [On its idiomatic omission (Lk. xii. 47, ete.) ef. Β. 82 (13); W. § 64, 4.] ὩΣ a public calamity, heavy affliction, [ οἵ. Eng. plague], (now tormenting now destroying the bodies of men, and sent by God as a punishment) : Rev. ix. 18 [Ree. om.], 20; xi. 6; xv. 1, 6, 8; xvi. 9,[21]; xviii. 4,85 xxi.9; xxii. 18. [Cf. md. Διός, Soph. Aj. 137 (cf. 279); al.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πληγή, “blow ’’: cf. Chrest. IL. 69 (B.C. 246) πληγάς μοι ἐνέβαλεν, P Tebt I. 4419 (B.c. 114) ἔδωκεν πληγὰς πλείους ἧι [εἸῖχεν ῥάβδωι, P Fay 1217 (c. π.6. 103) ἤγαγον μεθ᾽ ὕβρεως καὶ πληγῶν, ‘they dragged me away with insults and blows,’’ and P Tebt 11. 33129 (c. A.b. 131) ἐϊπήνεγκά[ν μο]ι πληγὰς εἰς πᾶν μέλ[ο]ς το[ῦ σ]ώματος. Add from the law of astynomy at Pergamum, carved on stone in the time of Trajan, OG/S 483177, αὐτὸς μαστιγούσθω ἐν τῶι κύφωνι (‘‘ the pillory’’) πληγαῖς πεντήκοντα, and see also Sy// 737 (=* 1109)** (A.p. 178) ἐὰν δέ τις ἄχρι πληγῶν ἔλθῃ, ἀπογραφέστω ὁ πληγεὶς πρὸς τὸν ἱερέα ἢ τὸν ἀνθιερέα. For the ellipsis οἵ πληγάς in Lk 1247, 2 Cor 11%, cf. Herodas IIT. 77, V. 33 (with Headlam’s…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πληγή (plēgē) — plague/blow/wound.

πληγ-ή,

Doric dialect πλᾱγά, ἡ, (πλήσσω) blow, stroke, πεπληγὼν πληγῇσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently joined with Verbs of cognate signification, πέπληγμαι καιρίαν πληγήν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τύπτεσθαι τῇ δημοσίᾳ μάστιγι ν πληγάς Legal cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently omitted, τρίτην ἐπενδίδωμι [NT+5th c.BC+]; καιρίῃ (i.e. πληγῇ) τετύφθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. ἐμβαλεῖν, ἐντείνειν τινί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πληγαῖς ζημιοῦν, κολάζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πληγῆς ἄρχειν strike the first blow, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς π. στέγειν, of the shell of a tortoise, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πληγή

plege

from 4141; a stroke; by implication, a wound; figuratively, a

calamity:--plague, stripe, wound(-ed).

see GREEK for 4141

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πληγή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

a blow, stripe, wound

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πληγή plēgē 22x

a blow, stroke, stripe, Lk. 10:30; 12:48; meton. a wound, Acts 16:33; Rev. 13:3, 12, 14; from the Hebrew, a plague, affliction, calamity, Rev. 9:20; 11:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πληγή πληγή, doric πλα_γά, ἡ,

πλήσσω a blow, stroke, Lat. plaga, Hom., etc.; πληγὴν πέπληγμαι καιρίαν Aesch.; in such phrases πληγήν or πληγάς is often omitted, πολλὰς τυπτόμενος Ar., etc.:—the person struck is said πληγὰς λαβεῖν id. Ar.; the striker πληγὰς δοῦναι, ἐμβάλλειν, ἐντείνειν τινί Xen.

a stroke by lightning, Hes.: a blow, stroke of calamity, Aesch.; πλ. θεοῦ a blow from heaven, Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ Treatment of Pr 20:30; Isa 1:6; Lu 10:34

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
45%plagues
plagues45% · 10×plague14% · 3×wound14% · 3×wounds9% · 2×beatings9% · 2×blows5% · 1×stripes5% · 1×

22 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial41%object36%subject23%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 22 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐκἀπόἐν
ἑπτάIndec
Article the
ἐν
περισσῶςComp
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτός
ἄξιοςworthy, worthy of, d
δέbut, on the othe
πληγήwounds22×
what comes after →
Article the
θάνατοςdeathμάχαιραa swordἑπτάIndec
οὗτος
ἀποκτείνωI put to death, οὐδέNegκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
σφόδραexceedingly, greἵναin order that, sθάνατοςdeath
ἐπιτίθημιI put, place upon, l
ἀπέρχομαιI come or go awa
δέρωI flay, flog, scourg
ὀλίγος& Adv

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπληγή · 22× in the New Testament
Revelation 2 Corinthians Acts Luke
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 50 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 63c. AD 40

ταῖς γὰρ συνεχέσι πληγαῖς γυμναζόμενα καὶ βίᾳ τὴν φορὰν ἀνωθοῦντα κραταιότερά τέ ἐστι καὶ πιαίνεται μᾶλλον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.50c. AD 75–95

ἀφείλετο δὲ καὶ τὸν ὄφιν τὴν φωνὴν ὀργισθεὶς ἐπὶ τῇ κακοηθείᾳ τῇ πρὸς τὸν Ἄδαμον καὶ ἰὸν ἐντίθησιν ὑπὸ τὴν γλῶτταν αὐτῷ πολέμιον ἀποδείξας ἀνθρώποις καὶ ὑποθέμενος κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς φέρειν τὰς πληγάς, ὡς ἐν ἐκείνῃ τοῦ τε κακοῦ τοῦ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.12c. AD 100

λέγει γὰρ ὁ θεὸς τὴν πληγὴν τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ ὅτι ἐξ αὐτῶν: Ὅταν πατάξωσιν τὸν ποιμένα ἑαυτῶν, τότε ἀπολεῖται τὰ πρόβατα τῆς ποίμνης.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Louvre 1 1Soknopaiu Nesos (ArsinoitesAD 13

ἐφʼ ὃ ἔχω συκήρατον ἐξετρύγησεν βιαίως ὅσον ἠβούλετο. πρὸς ὃν καὶ λογοποιούμενος ἔδωκέν μοι πληγὰς πλείους καὶ κατέαξεν κράνωι τὴν ἀριστερὰν χεῖρα καὶ ἀπηνέγκατό μου χιτῶνα καὶ ζώνην καὶ

P.Sijp. 14Philadelphia (?) (Arsinoites)AD 22

θυγάτηρ … … ερε … οῦς, αἱ δύο, καταπεριστᾶσαι τὴν θυγατέρα μου ἔδοσαν αὐτῆι πληγὰς πλείους καὶ ἀφήρπασαν τὸν ταύτης χιτῶνα καὶ τὰς τοῦ ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς τέσσαρας. διὸ ἀξιῶ,

P.Athen.. 32Karanis? (Arsinoites)AD 39

εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν μου ἀπηνέγκαντο ἱματισμὸν … πάντες βε … σκεύη καὶ ἐπήνεγκάν μοι πληγὰς πλείστας εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματος … ἐπιθέντες τη … ὥρας δ τῆς

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ἐπιθέντεςepitithēmi having inflicted G2007 Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
40× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to put or lay something on someone, like in Matthew 27:29 where a crown of thorns was placed on Jesus.
Tyndale gloss
to put/lay on
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπιτίθημι (i.e., *epitithēmi*) means to lay, set, or place upon something. It can also imply adding to, imposing, or inflicting, and is used in various contexts, such as laying hands on someone or imposing a penalty. In the New Testament, it appears in verses like Matthew 9:18 and Revelation 22:18. The word is built from the prefix ἐπι- and the root τίθημι.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπι-τίθημι

[in LXX for נָתַן, שָׁוָה, etc. ;]

to lay, set or place upon: c. acc rei, seq. ἐπί, c. acc rei, Mt 23:4, Lk 15:5, Jo 9:6 (WH, txt.), 15, Ac 15:10 28:3; ἐπί, c. gen. rei, Mt 27:29; ἐν, ib.; c. dat. pers., σταυρόν, Lk 23:26; στέφανον, Jo 19:2; ὄνομα, Mk 3:16, 17; πληγάς, Lk 10:30, Ac 16:23; ἐπί c. acc pers., Re 22:18; of the laying on of hands, τ. χεῖρα (-ας), seq. ἐπί c. acc…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπι-τίθημι, 3 pers. plur. ἐπιτιθέασι (Mt. xxiii. 4; οἵ. W. § 14, 1b.; Β. 44 (38); Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 505; Kiihner i. p. 643; [Jelf § 274; and on this and foll. forms see Veitch 5. vv. τίθημι, τιθέω]), impy. ἐπιτίθει (1 Tim. ν. 22; see Matthiae § 210, 2 and 6; Bittm. Ausf. Spr. i. Ρ. 508; Kiihner § 209, 5; [Jelf § 274 obs. 4]); impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐπετίθουν (Acts viii. 17 RG), ἐπετίθεσαν (ib. LT Tr WH; ef. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 509; Β. 45 (39)); fut. ἐπιθήσω ; 1 aor. ἐπέθηκα; 2 aor. ἐπέθην, impv. ἐπίθες (Mt. ix. 18; Gen. xlviii. 18; Judg. xviii. 19); Mid., [pres. ἐπιτίθεμαι] ; fut. ἐπιθήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐπεθέμην ; [1 aor. pass. ἐπετέθην (Mk. iv. 21 RG)]; in Sept. chiefly for }D3, Dw and DWI; 1. Active: a. to put or lay upon: τὶ ἐπί τι, Mt. xxiii. 4; xxvii. 29R GL; Mk. iv. 21 RG; Lk. xv. 5; Jn. ix. [6 WH txt. Tr mrg.], 15; [xix. 2 Lumrg., see below]; Acts xv. 10 [οἵ. W. 318 (298); B.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπιτίθημι is construed with the acc. and dat., as in Ac 2819, in BGU IV. 12081 4 (B.c. 27) ὃ ἐπιτέθ[εισα7. τοῖς παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ [πιττάκ]ιον, 2b. 11397 (B.C. 5) Πάρθος. . . αὐτῇ ἐπέθηκεν TIptua (cf. Mk 38), P Ryl 11. 819 (c. a.p. 104) τὴν yap ὅλου τοῦ πράγματος ἐξουσίαν τοῖς κατασπ]ορεῦσι ἐπεθέμην, “for I gave the inspectors of sowing the conduct of the whole matter”? (Edd.), and with the acc. alone in 24. 121} (ii/A.D.) tT[as] σφραγεῖδας ds ἐπέθηκ[ε, ‘the seals which he affixed” (Edd.). In BGU IV. τοιοῦ (mid. ii/A.pD.) we have ὃς ἔδωκεν τὸν στρατηγὸν τοῦ νομοῦ els T[d] πέρας ἐπιθεῖναι τῇ] λογοθεσίᾳ. For the meaning “‘ persuade,” ‘‘ enjoin,” cf. P Oxy X. 12558 (A.D. 292) ἐπειθεμένου σου ἡμῖν, 26. 12651 (A.D. 336) ἐπέθετό μοι ἡ σὴ ἐμμέλε[ια ἐγγρά]φως δηλῶσαι, “your grace enjoined me to state in writing” (Edd.), and for the meaning ‘‘attack,” ‘‘assault,’’ as in Ac 181°, cf. P Tebt I. 1514 (B.c.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπιτίθημι (epitithēmi) — to put/lay on.

ἐπιτίθημι,

passive mostly furnished by ἐπίκειμαι: active, lay, put or place upon, of offerings laid on the altar, ἐπὶ μηρία θέντες Ἀπόλλωνι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; set meats on the table, εἴδατα πόλλ᾽ ἐπιθεῖσα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντ᾽ ἐπιθεῖτε on the car, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τινὶ κύρτον καὶ κώπαν, as a grave-monument, [Refs 7th c.BC+]: but also c.genitive, ἐ. λεχέων τινά [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κεφαλὴν ἐπὶ στέρνα τινός [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with accusative only, put upon, set up, ἐ. φάρμακα apply salves, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐ. μνημεῖά τινι to him, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπιτίθημι

epitithemi

from 1909 and 5087; to impose (in a friendly or hostile sense):--add

unto, lade, lay upon, put (up) on, set on (up),

+ surname, X wound.

see GREEK for 1909

see GREEK for 5087

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπιτίθημι

v.

I put, place upon, lay on

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπιτίθημι epitithēmi 39x

to put, place, or lay upon, Mt. 9:18; Lk. 4:40; to impose a name, Mk. 3:16, 17; to inflict, Acts 16:23; Lk. 10:30; Rev. 22:18; mid. to impose with authority, Acts 15:28; 28:10; to set or fall upon, assail, assault, attack, Acts 18:10

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπιτίθημι fut. -θήσω perf. -τέθεικα the Pass.is mostly furnished by ἐπίκειμαι Act. to lay, put or place upon, of offerings laid on the altar, meats on the table, etc., c. dat., Od., attic; also c. gen., Il., Hdt.:—c. acc. only, ἐπ. φάρμακα to apply salves, Il.; ἐπ. στήλην to set it up, Hdt.

to put on a covering or lid, Od.; λίθον ἐπέθηκε θύρῃσιν, i. e. put a stone as a door to the cave, put it before the door, id. Od.: to put a door to, shut it, Il., Hom.

to put to, grant or give besides, Il.

of Time, to add, bring on, Od.

μύθῳ or μύθοις τέλος ἐπιθεῖναι to put an end to them, Il.

to put on as a finish, ἐπέθηκε κορώνην id. Il.; ἐπ. κεφαλαῖον (v. sub κεφαλαῖον) Dem.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAP-NPM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
23%having laid
having laid23% · 9×put8% · 3×lay5% · 2×do lay5% · 2×he may lay5% · 2×he added5% · 2×they laid3% · 1×they were laying3% · 1×other renderings44% · 17×

39 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 25 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 40 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
πῶλοςa colt, young asβαρύςheavy, weighty, δώδεκαIndec
χείρa hand
Article theἄρρωστοςinfirm, sick, il
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ἀλλάbut, exceptἵναin order that, s
ἄκανθαa thorn-bush
ἐκ
αὐτός
ὄμμαan eyeἐπί
ἐπιτίθημιhaving inflicted40×
what comes after →
Article the
χείρa handπρόςθεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὄνομαname, character,
ἐπί
Article theαὐτός
σύ
βάροςa weight, burdenArticle the
ἐπάνωon the top, above, s
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπιτίθημι · 40× in the New Testament
Acts Mark Matthew Luke John Revelation 1 Timothy
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 180 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.91c. AD 40

ζητητέον δέ, διὰ τί πᾶσιν ἐπιτιθεὶς τοῖς ἄλλοις τὰ ὀνόματα οὐκ ἐπιτέθεικεν ἑαυτῷ.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.30c. AD 75–95

μετὰ δὴ τοῦτο τῇ δευτέρᾳ τῶν ἡμερῶν τὸν οὐρανὸν τοῖς ὅλοις ἐπιτίθησιν, ὅτʼ αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τῶν ἄλλων διακρίνας κατʼ αὐτὸν ἠξίωσε τετάχθαι, κρύσταλλόν τε περιπήξας αὐτῷ καὶ νότιον αὐτὸν καὶ ὑετώδη πρὸς τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν δρόσων ὠφέλειαν ἁρμοδίως τῇ γῇ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.8c. AD 100

καὶ ὅταν γένηται οὕτως, ἄγει ὁ βαστάζων τὸν τράγον εἰς τὴν ἔρημον καὶ ἀφαιρεῖ τὸ ἔριον καὶ ἐπιτίθησιν αὐτὸ ἐπὶ φρύγανον τὸ λεγόμενον ῥαχήλ, οὗ καὶ τοὺς βλαστοὺς εἰώθαμεν τρώγειν ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ εὑρίσκοντες: οὕτω μόνης τῆς ῥαχοῦς οἱ καρποὶ γλυκεῖς εἰσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
O.Petr. Mus. 190Berenike bzw. Koptos19 BC–AD 69

vestiges … ιου Α … ς χαίρειν ἀπέχω παρὰ σοῦ ἐπὶ Βερνίκης … σοι ἐπέθηκεν Πεταρ … … Ἁρσιήσεως εἰς … λόγον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας … vestiges

P.Athen.. 32Karanis? (Arsinoites)AD 39

σκεύη καὶ ἐπήνεγκάν μοι πληγὰς πλείστας εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματος … ἐπιθέντες τη … ὥρας δ τῆς … … ἐπελθόντες ἐπὶ τὴν οἰκίαν

P. Merton 3 118OxyrhynchosAD 82

αὐτῶν ὃ ἀνῄρηνται κοινῶς ἐξ ἴσου … ἀπὸ κοπρίας εἰς δουλείαν θηλυκὸν σωμάτιον ᾧ ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα Θεανοῦς ὥστε τὴν ὁμολογοῦσαν τοῦτο θρέψαι καὶ θηλάσαι τῷ ἰδίῳ ἑαυτῆς γάλακτι ἔτι

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ἀπῆλθονaperchomai they went away G565 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
117× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to go away or depart from a place or person, as seen in Matthew 13:25. It can also mean to follow or go behind someone, and is often used in the Gospels to describe Jesus' travels. The word is used in various contexts, including Jesus' parables.
Amplified meaning
departed, left him
Tyndale gloss
to go away
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπέρχομαι (i.e., *aperchomai*) means to go away or depart, and can imply both leaving a place and arriving at another. It is used in various contexts, including literal departures and metaphorical senses, such as following someone. Notably, some lexicographers disagree on whether it can mean to return, with Thayer suggesting it does not inherently carry that meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπ-έρχομαι,

[in LXX chiefly for הלךְ;]

to go away, depart (also, in late writers, with "perfective" force, to arrive at a destination, the thought being carried on to the goal; M, Pr., 111 f., 247; MM, s.v.);

absol.: Mt 13:25, al.; ptcp., ἀπελθών, used pleonastically with other verbs as in Heb. (Dalman, Words, 21), Mt 13:28, al.;

with mention of place or person: εἰς, Mt 14:15; ἐπί, Lk 24:24; πρός, Re 10:9; ἀπό, Lk 1:38; ἐξω, Ac 4:15; ἐκεῖ, Mt…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπ-έρχομαι ; fut. ἀπελεύσομαι (Mt. xxv. 46; Ro. xv. 28; W. 86 (82)); 2 aor. ἀπῆλθον (ἀπῆλθα in Rev. x. 9 [where RG Tr -θον], ἀπῆλθαν LT Tr WH in Mt. xxii. 22; Rev. xxi. 1, 4 [(but here WH txt. only), ete., and WH in Lk. xxiv. 24]; cf. W. § 13,1; Mullach p. 17 sq. [226]; B. 39 (34); [.Soph. Lex. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 164 sq.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. p. lxiv.; Scrivener, Introd. p. 562; Collation, ete., p. liv. sq.]); pf. ἀπελήλυθα (Jas. i. 24); plpf. ἀπεληλύθειν (In. iv. 8) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to go away (fr. a place), to depart; 1. properly, a. absol.: Mt. xiii. 25; xix. 22; Mk. v. 20; Lk. viii. 39; xvii. 23; Jn. xvi. 7, ete. Ptep. ἀπελθών with indic. or subj. of other verbs in past time to go (away) and ete.: Mt. xiii. 28,46; xviii. 30; xxv. 18, 25; xxvi. 36; xxvii. 5; Mk. vi. 27 (28), 37; Lk. v.14. Ὁ. with specification of the place into which, or of the person to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπέρχομαι occurs in a special sense in the affectionate letter of Philonides to his father the “‘ architect’ Cleon, P Petr II. 13 (19)? (middle of iii/B.c.) (=Witkowski?, p. 19), ζῶντός σου καὶ εἰς θεοὺς ἀπελθόντος. So, much later, in the beautiful simplicity of a Christian epitaph, Preisigke 1190: Tahoat ἐβίωσεν Parr I, qa ἀπέχω εἴκουσι ὀκτώ, γ(ίνονται) (ἔτη) KH His λαμπρὰν (sc. γῆν) ἀπῆλθεν ---ἃ striking contrast to the monotonous ἄωρε χαῖρε on the pagan tombs of the young. of the word, it is sufficient to cite P Par 32°* (B.c. 162) γινώσκετε, ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀπελήλυθα, μὴ ἐσχολα[κέν]αι For the ordinary use A.D.) πρὶν οὖν ἀπέλθῃς πρὸς Χαιρήμονα, ἀνά(βαινεὶ πρός pe, ἵνα σοι ἀποτάξομαι. It inay be noted that “‘in later times the idea of the word goes forward to the goal” (Usener, Pe/agiaLegenden, p. 49). So in Pelagia, p. 75) ἀπήλθαμεν ἐν τῇ μεγάλῃ ἐκκλησίᾳ, “ we arrived at the great…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπέρχομαι (aperchomai) — to go away.

ἀπέρχομαι,

future -ελεύσομαι (Attic dialect future ἄπειμι): perfect -ελήλυθα: aorist -ῆλθον:— go away, depart from, with genitive, πάτρης[Refs 8th c.BC+] cease from tears. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. with εἰς, implying departure from one place and arrival at another, ἀ. ἐς τὰς Σάρδις[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. ἐπ᾽ οἴκου depart homewards, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπῆλθεν ὅθεν.. went back to the place whence he came, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. absolutely, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ταχεῖ᾽ ἀπέρχεται (i.e. ἡ νόσος) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κᾷτ᾽ ὀφλὼν ἀ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄπελθε τουτονὶ λαβών take him and be off! [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. with participle, ἀ. νικῶν come off conqueror, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπέρχομαι

aperchomai

from 575 and 2064; to go off (i.e. depart), aside (i.e. apart) or

behind (i.e. follow), literally or figuratively:--come, depart, go

(aside, away, back, out, ... ways), pass away, be past.

see GREEK for 575

see GREEK for 2064

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπέρχομαι

v.

I come or go away from, depart, return

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπέρχομαι aperchomai 117x

to go away, depart, Mt. 8:18; to go forth, pervade, as a rumor, Mt. 4:24; to arrive at a destination, Lk. 23:33; to pass away, disappear, Rev. 21:4; ἀπέρχομαι ὀπίσω, to follow, Mk. 1:20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπέρχομαι to go away, depart from, c. gen., Hom., attic; ἀπό or ἐκ τόπου Thuc.

when used with εἰς, departure from one place and arrival at another is implied, ἀπ. ἐς Σάρδις Hdt., etc.

absol. to depart, id. Hdt., Thuc., etc.: to depart from life, Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-3P — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
11%having gone
having gone11% · 13×having gone away11% · 13×went away10% · 12×they went away7% · 8×he went away7% · 8×he departed7% · 8×departed4% · 5×go3% · 4×other renderings40% · 48×

119 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 44 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb83%adverbial17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 117 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
γυνήa woman, wife, mφεύγωI flee, escape, σῖτοςwheat, grain
αὐτός
μαθητήςa learner, disciἀφίημιI send away, relκαταλείπωI leave behind,
ἀλλάbut, except
θέλωI will, wish, deλέγωI say, speakἸουδαῖοςJewish
μήNeg
ἔθνοςa race, people, ὧδεhereγάρfor
ἵναin order that, so th
ὄχλοςa crowdἐγώαὐτός
ἀπέρχομαιthey went away117×
what comes after →
εἰς
Article theἔρημοςdeserted, desolaἈραβίαArabia
καίand, even, also, nam
θάπτωI buryεἰςπολύςmuch, many, ofte
ἀπό
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
Article the
ἀκοήhearing, facultyἄνθρωποςa man, one of thἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
Article theαὐτόςἑαυτοῦMt 6:34, Lk 12:1

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπέρχομαι · 117× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark John Luke Revelation Acts Galatians James Jude Romans

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 69 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn Joseph 126c. AD 40

ἦλθον, ἀπῆλθον, ἐφάνησαν, ἀπεπήδησαν, πρὶν καταληφθῆναι βεβαίως ἀπέπτησαν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.115c. AD 75–95

οὐ γὰρ ἦν αὐτοῖς εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπελθεῖν μὴ μετὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν ἀπερχομένοις, καὶ τοῦ πάθους οὖν χείρονος καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν γινομένου καὶ τῶν υἱῶν δεομένων οὐκ εἶχεν, ὅ τι χρήσαιτο τοῖς παροῦσιν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 12.4c. AD 96

ἐπισταθέντων δὲ τῶν παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ λεγόντων: Πρὸς σὲ εἰσῆλθον οἱ κατάσκοποι τῆς γῆς ἡμῶν: ἐξάγαγε αὐτούς, ὁ γὰρ βασιλεὺς οὕτως κελεύει, ἥδε ἀπεκρίθη: Εἰσῆλθον μὲν οἱ ἄνδρες, οὓς ζητεῖτε, πρός με, ἀλλ̓ εὐθέως ἀπῆλθον καὶ πορεύονται τῇ ὁδῷ:…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59368Memphis (?)242 BC

Ασ· παραγενομένου γὰρ τοῦ πλοίου ἐπὶ τὸν ὅρμον καὶ τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ κωλυσάντων κενὸν ἀπῆλθεν. ἀξιοῦμεν οὖν σε, ἐπειδὴ οὐθʼ ἡμῖν ἐκποιεῖ ἀποδημεῖν οὔτʼ ἐκείνωι ἐνθάδε παραγενέσθαι, γράψαι αὐτῶι

P.Fay. 123Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 100

σοι. ἐλήλυθεν γὰρ Τεύφιλος Ἰουδαῖος λέγων ὅτι ἤχθην εἰς γεωργίαν καὶ βούλομαι πρὸς Σαβεῖνον ἀπελθεῖν. οὔτε γὰρ εἴρηκε ἡμῖν ἀγόμενος ἵνα ἀπολυθῇ, ἀλλὰ αἰφνιδίως εἴρηκεν ἡμῖν σήμερον. γνώσομαι γὰρ

P.Fay. 116Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 104

εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ ποίησον … τας καλοὺς τεσσαράκοντα , ἐπεὶ βουλεύομαι εἰς πόλιν ἀπελθεῖν χάριν τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ χάριν ἐκείνου τοῦ μετεώρου ἕως πεντεκαιδεκάτης τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνὸς Χύακ,

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ἀφέντεςaphiēmi having left [him] G863 Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
143× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To release or leave something means to let it go or send it away, as seen in Matthew 27:50 and 1 Corinthians 7:11-13. It can also mean to forgive or remit debts and sins.
Amplified meaning
abandoning him, giving him up
Tyndale gloss
to release: leave
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἀφίημι (aphiemi) means to send away or release, encompassing a range of actions such as forgiving debts or sins, allowing someone to depart, and neglecting something. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including forgiveness in Matthew 9:2 and the release of the spirit in Matthew 27:50. The word is built from the prefix ἀπ- (away) and ἵημι (to send).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀφ-ίημι,

[in LXX for נשׂא, נוח hi., נתן, סלח ni., עזב, etc.;]

to send forth, send away, let go: of divorce (DB, iii, 274a), τ. γυναῖκα (Hdt.), I Co 7:11-13; of death, τ. πνεῦμα (Ge 35:18, Hdt., al.), Mt 27:50; (φωνήν, to utter a cry, Mk 15:37; of debts, to remit, forgive (cl.), τ. δανεῖον, Mt 18:27; τ. ὀφειλήν, Mt 18:32; esp. of sins (Cremer 296 f.), τ. ἁμαρτίας, ἁμαρτήματα, ἀνομίας, Mt 9:2, Ro 4:7(LXX), I Jo 1:9, al.; punctiliar and…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀφ-ίημι ; pres. 2 pers. sing. ἀφεῖς (fr. the form apéw, Rev. ii. 20 for Ree. ἐᾷς), [3 pers. plur. ἀφιοῦσιν Rev. xi. 9 Tdf. edd. 2, 7, ἔν. a form ἀφιέω ; cf. B. 48 (42)]; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἤφιε, with the augm. before the prep., Mk. i. 34; xi. 16, fr. the form apiw; whence also pres. 1 pers. plur. ἀφίομεν Lk. xi. 4 L T Tr WH for ἀφίεμεν Ree. and 3 pers. apiovow Rev. xi. 9 L T Tr WH; [see WH. App. p-: 167]; fut. ἀφήσω; 1 aor. ἀφῆκα, 2 pers. sing. -xes Rev. ii. 4 T Tr WH (cf. κοπιάω] ; 2 aor. impv. ἄφες, ἄφετε, subj. 8 pers. sing. ἀφῇ, 2 pers. plur. ἀφῆτε, [inf. ἀφεῖναι (Mt. xxiii. 23 L T Tr WH; LK. v. 21 L txt. T Tr WH)], ptep. ἀφείς, ἀφέντες ; Pass., pres. ἀφίεμαι, [yet 3 pers. plur. apiovra Jn. xx. 23 WH mrg. ete.; cf. ἀφίω above]; pf. 3 pers. plur. ἀφέωνται (a Doric form [ef. W. § 14, 3 a.; B 49 (42); Kiihner § 285, 4], Mt. ix. 2,5; Mk. ii. 5, [9] —in both these Gospels L [exe. in Mk.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀφίημι. Some abnormal NT forms of this very “irregular ’’ verb may be illustrated: cf. Moulton, Ainéectung, p. 82f. The unaugmented aor. pass. ἀφέθησαν in Rom 47 (from Ps 311) where δὲ has ἀφείθησαν) is matched by OG/S 435° (ii/B.c.) ἀφέθη; but BGU IV. 10228 (a.p. 196) ἀφθείθημεν (zc. ἀφειθ.). ᾿Αφέωνται is to be compared with the imper. ἀφεώσθω in Michel §85'4 (Arcadian ?iii/B.C.), as well as with the Herodotean ἀνέωται : see Pro/eg. p. 38 2. Against this note imper. ἀφείσθω in CPHerm 119 verso lii- 14 (Gallienus). The pres. ἀφεῖς in Rev 27° and Ex 32%? is best taken as a regular contraction of doles, from ἀφίω (not a contract verb), which is the normal conjugation into which the -μι verb tends here to merge itself: evidence for ἀφιέω seems to be wanting. The assumption of an ἀφέω, formed by proportion from ἀφήσω, is insufficiently supported by the barbarous Silco inscr., OG/7S 20118…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀφίημι (aphiēmi) — to release: leave.

ἀφίημι,

2nd pers.singular ἀφίης[Refs 5th c.BC+] Ionic dialect ἀπίει[Refs 5th c.BC+], 1st pers.plural ἀφίεμεν[Refs 5th c.BC+]imperfect ἀφίειν, with double augment ἠφίειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers.singular ἀφίει[Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect ἀπίει[NT+5th c.BC+]; 2nd pers.plural ἀφίετε[Refs 4th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers.plural ἀφίεσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future ἀφήσω[Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect ἀπ-[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἀφεῖκα[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist I ἀφῆκα, Ionic dialectἀπ-, Epic dialect ἀφέηκα, used in indicative only, [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist 2 indicative only in dual and plural, ἀφέτην, ἀφεῖμεν, ἀφεῖτε or ἄφετε, ἀφεῖσαν or ἄφεσα; imperative ἄφες, subjunctive ἀφῶ, optative αφείην (2nd pers.plural ἀφεῖτε[Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive ἀφεῖναι, participle ἀφείς:—middle, ἀφίεμαι, Ionic dialect ἀπίεμαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: imperfect 3rd.pers.singular…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀφίημι

aphiemi

from 575 and hiemi (to send; an intensive form of eimi, to go); to

send forth, in various applications (as follow):--cry, forgive,

forsake, lay aside, leave, let (alone, be, go, have), omit, put (send)

away, remit, suffer, yield up.

see GREEK for 575

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀφίημι

v.

I send away, release, remit, forgive, permit

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀφίημι aphiēmi 143x

to send away, dismiss, suffer to depart; to emit, send forth; τὴν φωνήν, the voice, to cry out, utter an exclamation, Mk. 15:37; τὸ πνεῦμα, the spirit, to expire, Mt. 27:50; to omit, pass over or by; to let alone, care not for, Mt. 15:14; 23:23; Heb. 6:1; to permit, suffer, let, forbid not; to give up, yield, resign, Mt. 5:40; to remit, forgive, pardon; to relax, suffer to become less intense, Rev. 2:4; to leave, depart from; to desert, forsake; to leave remaining or alone; to leave behind, i.e. at one’s death, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀφίημι ι short in epic, except in augm. tenses: ι_ attic to send forth, discharge, Lat. emittere, of missiles, Hom., etc.:—hence to let loose, utter, give vent to words, Hdt., Trag.

to let fall, Il.

to send forth an expedition, dispatch it, Hdt.: Pass., of troops, id. Hdt.

to give up or hand over to, τινι τί id. Hdt., attic:—Pass., ἡ Ἀττικὴ ἀπεῖτο ἤδη Hdt.

to send away, let go, loose, set free, Il., attic:—c. acc. pers. et gen. rei, to set free from a thing, let off from, Hdt.: in legal sense to release from an engagement, accusation, etc., ἀφ. τινὰ φόνου Dem.

to dissolve, disband, break up an army, Hdt.:— to dismiss the council or law-courts, Ar.

to put away, divorce, Hdt.

to let go as an ἄφετος, consecrate, Xen.

of things, to get rid of, δίψαν Il.; to shed its blossoms, of plants, Od.; to slacken its force, of a dart, Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAP-NPM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
10%having left
having left10% · 14×left8% · 11×forgiven4% · 6×forgive4% · 6×will be forgiven3% · 5×have been forgiven3% · 5×do permit3% · 5×do leave3% · 5×other renderings61% · 89×

146 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 69 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 143 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐγώθαυμάζωI wonder, admire
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,βλασφημίαabusive or scurrἅγιοςset apart, holy,
μήNeg
οὐNegαὐτόςδέbut, on the othe
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπαράπτωμαa falling away,
λέγωI say, speak
εὔκοποςeasierἸησοῦςJesusαὐτός
ἀφίημιhaving left [him]143×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἀπέρχομαιI come or go awa
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thπαιδίονa little child, δίκτυονa fishing-net
σύ
Article theἐπείafter, for, sincὀρφανόςbereaved, an orp
ἐγώ
Article theμόνοςonly, solitary,
ἁμαρτίαa sin
τότεthenεἰCondἐπί

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀφίημι · 143× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark Luke John 1 Corinthians Acts Revelation 1 John Hebrews Romans James

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 48 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 62c. AD 40

χρώματα μὲν [ἡ] ὅρασις, φωνὰς δὲ ἀκοή, χυλοὺς δὲ γεῦσις, καὶ ὄσφρησις ἀτμούς, μαλακότητας δὲ καὶ σκληρότητας καὶ ὅσα θερμὰ ἢ ψυχρὰ λειότητάς τε καὶ τραχύτητας ἁφή.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.218c. AD 75–95

ὡς δʼ ἀπιοῦσαν ἐπιλελοίπει τὰ ἀναγκαῖα, ἐν κακοῖς ἦν, ὕδατος δὲ σπανίζοντος ὑπʼ ἐλάτῃ τινὶ θεῖσα τὸ παιδίον ψυχορραγοῦν, ὡς μὴ παρούσης τὴν ψυχὴν ἀφῇ, προῄει πορρωτέρω.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 13.2c. AD 96

οὕτως γὰρ εἶπεν: Ἐλεᾶτε, ἵνα ἐλεηθῆτε: ἀφίετε, ἵνα ἀφεθῇ ὑμῖν: ὡς ποιεῖτε, οὕτω ποιηθήσεται ὑμῖν: ὡς δίδοτε, οὕτως δοθήσεται ὑμῖν: ὡς κρίνετε, οὕτως κριθήσεσθε: ὡς χρηστεύεσθε, οὕτως χρηστευθήσεται ὑμῖν: ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, ἐν αὐτῷ μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Lond. 7 2008Philadelphia (Arsinoites)248 BC

κομίσωμαι, ἔφη, τό τε ἐκφόριον καὶ τὸ ἀνήλωμα, ἐάν τι καταλείπεται κομίσασθε. καὶ ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν οὖν αὐτούς. τὸν σπόρον τοῦ σησάμου ἐφώδευσα τῆι θ τοῦ Φαμενώθ, καὶ ἐνῆν ἀνατολὴ

Ζήνων ὑπὲρ στρ … … παραλάβετε Κλέαρχον … τὸ φόρετρον καὶ συντ … αὐτὸν ἄφετε ἔρρωσο. ε ἔτους … Μεσορὴ β

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59374Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)208 BC–207 BC

ἔτους ιϛ, Πανήμου ἐμβολίμου. ἄφες ἐκ καταπλοῦ ἐν βασιλικῆι εἰκοσόρωι εἰς Φιλάμμονα Θεσσαλὸν τῶν Νικοφίλου ξεναγὸν σχιζίαν πυρράκη κλαστὸν

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
ἡμιθανῆhēmithanēs half dead G2253 Adjective · accusative · singular · masculine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for half-dead means being extremely exhausted, as in the parable of the good Samaritan in Luke 10:30. It describes someone who is severely weakened.
Amplified meaning
severely injured, almost dead, on the brink of death
Tyndale gloss
half-dead
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἡμιθανής (i.e., *hēmithanēs*) means 'half-dead,' derived from components meaning 'half' and 'to die.' It appears in the New Testament in Luke 10:30, describing a man who was left in a state of severe injury. The term is rare in classical literature, but it is used similarly in other ancient texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

**† ἡμιθανής, -ές

(< ἥμι, half + θνήσκω),

[in LXX: IV Mac 4:11*;]

half-dead: Lk 10:30.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἡμιθανής, -ἐς, (fr. Fue half, and θνήσκω, 2 aor. ἔθανον), half dead: Lk. x. 30. ({Dion. Hal. 10, 7]; Diod. 12, 62; Strab. 2 p. 98; Anthol. 11, 392, 4; [4 Mace. iv. 11]; 4}

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἡμιθανής. A good parallel to the use of this rare word (for class. | ἡμιθνής) in Lk 10% is afforded by P Amh II. 1417* (a.D. 350) where a woman lodges a complaint regarding an assault committed on her by her brother and his wife—mAnyats ἱκαναῖς pe κατέκτιϊνα]ν. . . . ἡμιθανῆ καταστήσαντες, “they nearly killed me by numbers of blows and left me half dead ”’ (Edd.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἡμιθανής (hēmithanēs) — half-dead.

ἡμι-θᾰνής, ές,

half-dead, [NT+1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἡμιθανής

hemithanes

from a presumed compound of the base of 2255 and 2348; half dead, i.e.

entirely exhausted:--half dead.

see GREEK for 2255

see GREEK for 2348

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἡμιθανής, ές

Adj

half-dead

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἡμιθανής hēmithanēs 1x

half dead, Lk. 10:30*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἡμιθανής ἡμι-θα^νής, ές θνήσκω half-dead, Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASM — Adjective · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ded (muth; nekros): Used in several senses:

(1) as a substantive, denoting the body deprived of life, as when Abraham speaks of burying his dead (Ge 23);

(2) as a collective noun including all those that have passed away from life (as Re 20:12). In several passages dead in this sense is used in contrast to the quick or living (as Nu 16:48). This collective mode of expression is used when resurrection is described as "rising from the dead";

(3) as an adjective, coupled with body, carcass or man, as De 14:8 the King James Version;

(4) most frequently it is used as a complement of the verb "to be," referring to the condition of being deceased or the period of death, e. g. 2Sa…

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 5th c. AD 6th c. AD

ιων πεποιθότες … κον ἀδελφόν μου κ … τῆς κεφαλῆς πε … ἡμιθανῆ γενέσθαι … ἐσχάτως διακειμ … τῆς εἰρήνης ὄντ … αὐτοὶ καὶ ἄλλοτε ε

P.Lond. 2 p. XXXVIII no. 420 descr.Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)AD 343

νῦν οὐδὲν αὐτοῖς χρεωστῶν, ὃ καὶ διὰ μεσίτου ἐπιδείκνυμι … ιρηρκαι με ἀπʼ αὐτῶν ἡμιθανῆ, καί ἐστι … ας τὸ ὄνομα. διὰ αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἐπιδίδωμί σοι ταῦτα τὰ ἔγγραφα,

P.Amh. 2 141HermopolitesAD 350

λακτίσμασιν καθʼ ὅλων τῶν σωμάτων ὡς καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ὄψεών μου τὰ οἰδήματα φαίνεται, ἡμιθανῆ καταστήσαντες, οὐδὲν ἧττον καὶ τὴν περὶ ἐμὲ ἐσθῆτα περιέσχισαν. ὅθεν οὐ δυναμένη ἀφησυχάσαι γυνὴ

Having taken [it] up now <the> Jesus said; A man certain was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho and robbers fell among who both having stripped him and wounds having inflicted they went away having left [him] half dead state.
τυγχάνοντα.tugchanō state. G5177 Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · singular · masculine
12× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Luke than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To obtain or happen, like hitting a target, as in Acts 19:11 where it means to meet with someone by chance.
Tyndale gloss
to obtain/happen
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τυγχάνω is a verb meaning 'to hit' or 'to happen upon.' It can refer to obtaining something or encountering someone by chance. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like obtaining a reward (Lk 20:35) and expressing possibility (1 Cor 14:10). The lexicons agree on its general meanings but differ slightly on nuances in usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τυγχάνω

[in LXX: De 19:5 (מָצָא), Jb 3:21 7:2 17:1, Pr 24:58 (30:23) (without definite Heb. equiv.), Wi 15:19, I Mac 11:42, III Mac 3:7, al. ;]

Trans.

to hit (opp. to ἁμαρτάνω, to miss the mark: Hom., Xen., al.).

to hit upon, light upon;

of persons, to meet with, fall in with: absol., ptcp., ὁ τυχών, a chance person, anyone (Lat. quivis), οὐ τυχών, not common or ordinary, Ac 19:11 28:2;

of things, to reach, get, obtain: c. gen. rei. Lk 20:35, Ac 24:3 26:22 27:3, II Ti 2:10

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τυγχάνω ; 2 aor. ἔτυχον ; pf. (Heb. viii. 6) τέτευχα [so cod. 8], and (so L T Tr mrg. WH cod. δὲ) τέτυχα a later and rarer form (which not a few incorrectly think is everywhere to be regarded as a clerical error; B. 67 (59); Kiihner § 343 s. νος [Veitch s. v.; Phryn. ed. Lob. p- 595; WH. App. p.171]), in some texts also τετύχηκα (a form com. in the earlier writ. [2 utherford, New Phryn. Ρ- 483 sq., and reff. as above]); a verb in freq. use fr. Hom. down; “est Lat. atlingere et contingere; Germ. treffen, ὁ. accus. i. q. etwas erlangen, neut. es trifft sich.” Ast, Lex. Platon. 5. v.; hence 1. trans. ae prop. to hit the mark (opp. to ἁμαρτάνειν to miss the mark), of one discharging a javelin or arrow, (Hom., Xen., Leian.). b. trop. to reach, attain, obtain, get, become master of: with a gen. of the thing (W. 200 (188)), Lk. xx. 35 [W. 609 (566)]; Acts xxiv. 2 (3); xxvi. 22; xxvii. 3; 2…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τυγχάνω. (1) Τυγχάνω, properly “hit” as of hitting a mark, comes to be used in the sense “hit upon,” ‘light upon,” and thence ‘‘obtain’’ c. gen. rei, as in Ac 267%, 27% a/.: cf. P Petr 11. 13 (19)® (mid. iii/B.c.) τυχεῖν σε πάντων τῶν καλῶν, P Lond 4219 (B.c. 168) (=I. p. 30, UPZi. p. 300) σοῦ παραγενομένου τεύξεσθαί τινος ἀναψυχῆς, P Kyl IT. 6515 (B.C. 672) τυχεῖν δ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὧν προσήκει, “that they should receive also the proper penalty” (Edd.), 24. 12915 (A.D. 30) τοὺς τὸ τοιοῦτο διαπράξαντας τυχεῖν ὧν προσῆκόν ἐστιν, ““τπαὶ the authors of the crime receive due punishment ”’ (Edd.), and P Giss I. 4! (a.p. 118) (= Chres¢. I. p: 474) μόλ[ις τ]υχόντες ταύτης THs εὐεργεσίας. (2) For the verb equivalent to little more than εἰμί, cf. P Oxy VII. 107038 (iii/A.b.) σὺ αὐτὴ μήτη!ρ] τυγχάνουσα τοῦ τέκνου ἡμῶν, ‘you yourself as the mother of our child” (Ed.), and 25. X. 126529 (A.p. 336) κ[ἀϊκείν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τυγχάνω (tugchanō) — to obtain/happen.

τυγχάνω,

[Refs 6th c.BC+]: Epic dialect imperfect τύγχανον [Refs 8th c.BC+], (παρετ-) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future τεύξομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also as future middle of τεύχω): aorist 2 ἔτῠχον, Epic dialect τύχον, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.; Epic dialect subjunctive τύχωμι, -ῃσι, [Refs]; later also τετύχῃσι, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; late Epic dialect optative τετύχοιμι [Refs 4th c.AD+]: Epic dialect also aorist 1 ἐτύχησα [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect τετύχηκα (intransitive) [Refs 8th c.BC+] variant{τετυχηώς}. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later also τέτευχα, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Doric dialect perfect infinitive τετεύχεν [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; but Ionic dialect pluperfect ἐτετεύχεε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τέτυχα variant in [NT+1st c.AD+], (συν-) [Refs], etc.; participle τετυχώς [Refs]:—middle, aorist 1 τεύξασθαι [LXX]:— passive, imperfect ἐτυγχάνετο [Refs 2nd c.AD+]aorist 1…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τυγχάνω

tugchano

probably for an obsolete tucho (for which the middle voice of another

alternate teucho (to make ready or bring to pass) is used in certain

tenses; akin to the base of 5088 through the idea of effecting;

properly, to affect; or (specially), to hit or light upon (as a mark

to be reached), i.e. (transitively) to attain or secure an object or

end, or (intransitively) to happen (as if meeting with); but in the

latter application only impersonal (with 1487), i.e. perchance; or

(present participle) as adjective, usual (as if commonly met with,

with 3756, extraordinary), neuter (as adverb) perhaps; or (with

another verb) as adverb, by accident (as it were):--be, chance, enjoy,

little, obtain, X refresh...self, + special. Compare 5180.

see GREEK for 5180

see GREEK for 5088

see GREEK for 1487

see GREEK for 3756

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τυγχάνω

v.

I obtain, I happen, perhaps

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τυγχάνω tynchanō 12x

to hit an object; to attain to, to obtain, acquire, enjoy, Lk. 20:35; Acts 24:2; 26:22; 27:3; 2 Tim. 2:10; Heb. 8:6; 11:35; intrans. to happen, fall out, chance; common, ordinary, Acts 19:11; 28:2; as an adv., it may be, perchance, perhaps, 1 Cor. 16:6; εἰ τύχοι, as it so happens, as the case may be, 1 Cor. 14:10; 15:37*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τυγχάνω Root ΤΥΚ to hit, esp. to hit a mark with an arrow, Hom., etc.: he mostly constructs it with acc., when the object hit is alive, with gen. when it is lifeless; so, τ. τοῦ σκοποῦ Xen.;—a prep. is sometimes added, κατὰ κληῖδα, κατὰ ζωστῆρα τυχήσας [τινά] Il.;—absol., ἤμβροτες οὐδ᾽ ἔτυχες id. Hom.; the part. τυχών is often joined with βάλλειν, οὐτᾶν, etc., id. Hom.

to hit upon, light upon:

to meet by chance, meet with, fall in with a person, absol., Od.; c. gen., Aesch., etc.:—aor2 part. ὁ τυχών, the first one meets, any one, Lat. quivis, Hes., Plat., etc.; οἱ τυχόντες every-day men, the vulgar, Xen.; so, τὸ τυχόν any chance thing, Plat.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-ASM — Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-ASM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ See CHURCH AND STATE

→ See GOVERNMENT

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
15%it would be
it would be15% · 2×being ordinary8% · 1×we are attaining8% · 1×having obtained8% · 1×receive8% · 1×ordinary8% · 1×possibly8% · 1×may obtain8% · 1×other renderings31% · 4×

13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb92%adverbial8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
οὐNeg
εἰCond
τοσοῦτοςκόκκοςa kernel, grain
ἐκεῖνος
αἰώνan age, a cycle
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind
πολύςmuch, many, ofte
οὖνtherefore, then
ἐπικουρίαhelp, aid
τυγχάνωstate.12×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἀπόἐν
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the
διά
σύ
φιλανθρωπίαlove of mankind, ben
ἐγώ
γένοςoffspring, family, r
φωνήa sound, noise,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτυγχάνω · 12× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Timothy Luke
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 166c. AD 40

συνόλως γὰρ οὐκ ἀγνοητέον ὅτι οἷα ἑταιρὶς καὶ μαχλὰς οὖσα ἡδονὴ γλίχεται τυχεῖν ἐραστοῦ καὶ μαστροποὺς ἀναζητεῖ, δι’ ὧν τοῦτον ἀγκιστρεύσεται·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.273c. AD 75–95

ταῦτʼ οὖν καὶ βεβαίωσον καὶ μὴ περιίδῃς με διὰ τὴν παροῦσαν ἀσθένειαν, διʼ ἣν καὶ μᾶλλόν σου δεόμενος τυγχάνω, καί μοι παῖδα τοῦτον εὐμενὴς σῶζε καὶ παντὸς ἀπαθῆ κακοῦ διαφύλαττε δοὺς αὐτῷ βίον εὐδαίμονα καὶ κτῆσιν ἀγαθῶν, ὅσων σοι δύναμις…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 14.2c. AD 96

βλάβην γὰρ οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν, μᾶλλον δὲ κίνδυνον ὑποίσομεν μέγαν, ἐὰν ῥιψοκινδύνως ἐπιδῶμεν ἑαυτοὺς τοῖς θελήμασιν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, οἵτινες ἐξακοντίζουσιν εἰς ἔριν καὶ στάσεις, εἰς τὸ ἀπαλλοτριῶσαι ἡμᾶς τοῦ καλῶς ἔχοντος.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59460Theadelphia und Pharbaithos (Arsinoites)243 BC–242 BC

τα τὰ … ματα ὅπως ἂν τὸ δίκαιον ἀποδῶσί μοι, εἰ δὲ μή, ἵνα τύχωσιν τοῦ δικαίου, ἐὰν ἐπιδεικνύωσιν καὶ ἀδικοῦντας αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς. εὐτύχει.

Feste 60243 BC–242 BC

μοι τὴν κατὰ μῆνα γινομένην τιμὴν εἰς ἔτη δύο ὅπως ἂν ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιμεληθεὶς καὶ τυχὼν ἐπιστάτου εἰσέλθω εἰς τοὺς ἀγῶνας οὓς ὁ βασιλεὺς προτίθησιν καὶ μὴ καταφθαρῶ ἐνταῦθα, δυνατὸς

P.Grenf. 1 38Pathyrites171 BC

ὁ ἐνκεκλημένος προσπηδήσας μοι ἐνώπιόν τινων ἔτυπτεν ἧι εἶχεν ῥάβδωι πληγαῖς πλειόσιν εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματός μου. ὅ τε περιεβλήμην, ὀθόνιον κατέρηξεν, περὶ ὦν τοὺς παρόντας ἐπεμαρτυράμην.

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate